3WL Siemens

Siemens LV 1 2009
15
15/2 Introduction
3WL Air Circuit Breakers
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/
Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 6300 A (AC)
15/6 General data
15/7 3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/11 3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/15 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/23 Options
15/29 Accessories and spare parts
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 4000 A (DC)
15/50 3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/53 Accessories and spare parts
SENTRON Switching and
Protection Devices
Air Circuit Breakers
Siemens AG 2009
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices Air Circuit Breakers
Introduction
15/2
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Overview
Standard
-- Not available
Optional
1)
ETU15B cannot be used with 3WL circuit breakers, size III.
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
Air circuit breakers
3WL air circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC) 3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current I
n
A 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000,
5000, 6300
1000, 2000, 4000
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational
voltage U
e
V AC
V DC
... 690/1000/1150
--
--
... 1000
Rated ultimate
short-circuit breaking capacity
at 500 V AC
kA
Size I
55/66
Size II
66/80/100
Size III
100/150 (3-pole),
130 (4-pole)
30/25/20
(at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operating
cycles
20000 15000 10000 15000
Mounting position
Degree of protection
With cover IP55 IP55
Without cover
(with door sealing frame)
IP41 IP41
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
H mm 434 434 434 434
D mm
H mm
D mm
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
Type ETU15B
1)
ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76B
Electronic releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Overload protection
Short-time delayed
short-circuit protection
--
Instantaneous

Neutral conductor protection -- --
Ground-fault protection -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- --
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- --
Communication through
PROFIBUS DP
-- -- --
Measurement function Plus -- -- --
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- --
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- --
CubicleBUS -- -- --
Size III Size II Size I
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSS0_00535
H
W D
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
6
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
7
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
8
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
9
a
Rating Plug
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
1
a
Fixed
mounting
Withdraw-
able
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Introduction
15/3
Siemens LV 1 2009
Switching capacity
1)
Size II with I
n max
d 2500 A.
2)
Size II with I
n max
= 3200 A and I
n max
= 4000 A.
3)
At a rated voltage of 690 V the I
cw
value of the circuit breaker cannot be
greater than the I
cu
or I
cs
value at 690 V.
4)
Rated operational voltage U
e
= 1150 V.
Size I II III
Type 3WL11 3WL12 3WL13
Switching capacity class N S N S H H C
3-pole
C
4-pole
Short-circuit breaking capacity
e

up to 415 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 500 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 690 V AC
I
cu
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cs
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cm
kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
e

up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
I
cu
kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cs
kA -- -- -- -- 50 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cm
kA -- -- -- -- 150 105 154
4)
154
4)
Rated short-time withstand current I
cw

of the circuit breakers
3)
0.5 s kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 65
1)
/70
2)
80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 50
1)
/65
2)
65 65 65
Short-circuit breaking capacity I
cc

of the non-automatic air circuit breakers
Up to 500 V AC kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
Circuit breakers with ECO switching capacity N
(I
cu
= I
cs
up to 55 kA size I/up to 66 kA size II at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with standard switching capacity S
(I
cu
= I
cs
Circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
(I
cu
= I
cs
up to 100 kA at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with very high switching capacity C
(I
cu
= I
cs
up to 150 kA (3-pole)/130 kA (4-pole)
at 500 V)
Non-automatic air circuit breakers with DC switching
capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the selection and
ordering data by orange backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
15/4
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
SENTRON 3WL:
Superior individual products integrated into uniform power
distribution systems - up to and including industry-specific
industrial and infrastructure solutions
$ Guide frame (pages 15/30 to 15/33)
% Main circuit connection front, flange, horizontal, vertical
(pages 15/45 and 15/46)
& Position indicator switch (pages 15/26 and 15/38)
( Grounding contact, leading (page 15/42)
) Shutter (page 15/41)
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module (page 15/44)
+ External CubicleBUS module (page 15/43)
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release (page 15/40)
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system (page 15/39)
. Auxiliary switch block (page 15/40)
/ Door sealing frame (page 15/41)
0 Interlocking set for base plate (page 15/36)
1 Transparent panel, function insert (page 15/35)
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated (page 15/38)
3 Motorized operating mechanism (page 15/40)
4 Operating cycles counter (page 15/38)
5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) (page 15/44)
6 Protective device with device holder, electronic release (ETU)
(page 15/34)
7 Remote reset solenoid (page 15/35)
8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA) (page 15/43)
9 Four-line display (page 15/34)
: Ground-fault protection module (page 15/34)
; Rated current module (page 15/34)
< Measuring function module (page 15/34)
= Circuit breaker (pages 15/7 to 15/22)
18
17
16
20
15
21
23
22
24
14
19
6
4
5
7
8
9
2
25
10
11
12
13
3
1
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
8
7
a
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Introduction
15/5
Siemens LV 1 2009
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)
Features
Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL
and SENTRON 3WL
The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories
allows easy retrofitting of all communication components
Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the
possibility of linking up external input and output modules to
the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
Innovative software products for parameterization, operation,
monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers,
both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/
Intranet/Internet
Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the
Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation
solutions
Communication:
For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
(ETU45B or ETU76B electronic release)
see pages 15/7 to 15/22.
For accessories see pages 15/43 and 15/44.
For more information see also the chapter "Power Manage-
ment System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
5
1
21
22
19
8 6
2
4
20
14 15 16 17 18 7
9
1
3
10
11
12
13
SENTRON 3VL
Electronic LCD ETU release
Electronic ETU release
COM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSI
COM20 PROFIBUS module
2)
complete with ZSI
Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
BDA Plus with Ethernet interface
Browser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)
SENTRON 3WL
1)
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
1) For a MODBUS connection the COM16 module is required.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Measurement function Plus
ZSI module
Digital output module with relay contacts
Digital output module with relay contacts, configurable
Analog output module
Digital input module
Switch ES Power on PC
PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC powercontrol
PAC
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
5
h
PROFIBUS
Ethernet
CubicleBUS
Siemens AG 2009
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/6
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Benefits
Low space requirements
The SENTRON 3WL devices require very little space. Size I de-
vices (up to 1600 A) fit into a 400 mm wide switchgear panel.
Size III devices (up to 6300 A) are the smallest of their kind and
with their construction width of 704 mm fit into a 800 mm wide
switchgear panel.
Modular design
Components like auxiliary releases, motorized operating
mechanisms, electronic releases, current sensors, auxiliary cir-
cuit signaling switches, automatic reset devices, interlocks and
engagement operating mechanisms can all be exchanged or
retrofitted at a later stage, thus allowing the circuit breaker to be
adapted to new, changing requirements.
The main contact elements can all be replaced in order to in-
crease the endurance of the circuit breaker.
Retrofittable modules for electronic releases
Modularity is one of the main features of the new SENTRON 3WL
circuit breakers.
Special LCDs, ground-fault modules, rated current modules and
communication modules for the electronic releases are available
for fast and easy retrofitting and adaptation to changing
requirements.
Communication
The use of modern communication-capable circuit breakers
opens up completely new possibilities in terms of start-up,
parameterization, diagnostics, maintenance and operation. This
allows many different ways of reducing costs and improving pro-
ductivity in industrial plants, buildings and infrastructure projects
to be achieved.
Fast and reliable parameterization
Timely information and response can prevent plant
stoppages
Effective diagnostics management
Measured values are the basis for efficient load management,
for drawing up power demand profiles and for assigning en-
ergy to cost centers
Preventive maintenance reduces the risk of expansive plant
down-times
Application
As incoming-feeder, distribution, tie, and outgoing-feeder cir-
cuit breakers in electrical installations
For switching and protecting motors, capacitors, generators,
transformers, busbars and cables
Due to the reinforced use of electronic I&C systems, the de-
mands made on air circuit breakers in terms of operator control
and monitoring of network processes have increased.
The extensive, coordinated SENTRON range of devices covers
all applications between 16 A and 6300 A with compact and air
circuit breakers.
The AC devices are available as circuit breakers and non-auto-
matic air circuit breakers. DC devices are only available as non-
automatic air circuit breakers.
Standards
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:
IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30.
Versions with UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.
For further standards, see Appendix.
Conductor cross-sections
1) ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 C.
2) Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit
breakers: 4 120 10 mm.
Size I II
Type Up to
3WL11 10
3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20
Permissible load
At rear horizontal main
circuit connections
Up to 55 C (Cu bare)
1)
Up to 70 C (Cu black
painted)
1)
A
A
A
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1210
1600
1600
1490
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1600
1600
1600
2000
2000
2000
Main conductor
minimum
cross-sections
Copper bars,
bare
Copper bars,
painted black
Unit(s)
mm
2
Unit(s)
mm
2
1
60 10
1
60 10
2
40 10
2
40 10
2
50 10
2
50 10
1
50 10
1
50 10
1
60 10
1
60 10
2
40 10
2
40 10
2
50 10
2
50 10
3
50 10
3
50 10
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Permissible load Up to 55 C (Cu bare)
1)
painted)
1)
A
A
A
2500
2500
2280
3200
3020
2870
3950
3810
3600
4000
4000
4000
5000
5000
5000
5920
5810
5500
Main conductor
minimum
cross-sections
Copper bars,
bare
Copper bars,
painted black
Unit(s)
mm
2
Unit(s)
mm
2
2
100 10
2
100 10
3
100 10
3
100 10
4
120 10
4
100 10
2)
4 x
100 x 10
4
100 10
6 x
100 x 10
6
100 10
6 x
120 x 10
6
120 10
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
3-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/7
Siemens LV 1 2009
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Selection and ordering data

For footnotes see page 15/10.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,
ECO switching capacity N
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
For Order No. supplements,
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
Horizontal main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Vertical main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
Front main circuit connection, single hole
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Front main circuit connection, double hole
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
Non-automatic air circuit breakers
2)
Order No. supplements Add. price
Without electronic release AA Without
Electronic releases
Versions without ground-fault protection
ETU15B: Protection functions LI BB
ETU25B: Protection functions LSI CB
ETU45B: Protection functions LSIN
3)
EB
3)
with 4-line display FB
3)
with pixel graphics display NB
Versions with ground-fault protection
ETU27B: Protection functions LSING
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
with 4-line display FG
3)5)
with pixel graphics display NG
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements, see page 15/23)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing
Without 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO 1AA2 Without
N
Siemens AG 2009
15/8
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 66/80 kA at 500 V,
standard switching capacity S
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 43.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
2)
Order No. supplements Additional
price
Without electronic release
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
S
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/9
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
up to 100 kA at 500 V,
high switching capacity H
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
Order No. supplements,
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 59.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 64.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
ETU15B: Protection functions LI
6)
BB
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
H
Siemens AG 2009
15/10
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Footnotes for pages 15/7 to 15/10:
1)
The rated current is determined by the rated current module. For the stan-
dard version, the supplied module is equal to the maximum rated current.
If a lower rated current is required, adaptation by order code on
page 15/24.
2)
For permissible rated short-time current I
cc
and rated short-circuit making
capacity I
cm
for non-automatic air circuit breakers see Technical Informa-
tion LV 1T, "Technical specifications".
3)
Current transformers for protection of the N conductor and current trans-
formers for detection of the ground-fault current in the grounded neutral
point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
4)
Current transformers for protection of the N conductor are to be ordered
separately, see page 15/34.
5)
ETU45B and ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
and tripping), see page 15/34.
6)
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
very high switching capacity C
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 90.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
C
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
3-pole, withdrawable versions
15/11
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
Without guide frames
(for guide frames, see page 15/30 to 15/33)
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
With guide frames, horizontal main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
With guide frames, vertical main circuit connection
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
With guide frames, connecting flanges
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
2)
price
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
Standard Order No. supplements (for further Order No. supplements for circuit breakers and guide frames, see page 15/23)
N
Siemens AG 2009
15/12
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 66/80 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 70.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
2)
price
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
Without 1st and 2nd auxiliary releases; auxiliary switch 2 NC + 2 NO
1AA2 Without
S
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/13
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 63.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 102.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
2)
price
Electronic releases
6)
BB
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
H
Siemens AG 2009
15/14
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
page 15/24.
2)
cc
capacity I
cm
3)
point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34.
4)
5)
ETU45B to ETU76B with ground-fault protection module GFM AT (alarm
6)
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 96.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 4000 4000 150 B 3WL13 40-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 5000 5000 150 B 3WL13 50-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 148.000
III 6300 6300 150 B 3WL13 63-5@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 166.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
C
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/15
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
N
Siemens AG 2009
15/16
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 66/80 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 50.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
S
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/17
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 71.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 77.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
6)
BB
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
H
Siemens AG 2009
15/18
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
page 15/24.
2)
cc
capacity I
cm
3)
point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The
internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding
the supplement "Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4)
5)
6)
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 99.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
C
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/19
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 55/66 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 66 B 3WL12 40-2@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
I 630 630 55 B 3WL11 06-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 55 B 3WL11 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 55 B 3WL11 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 55 B 3WL11 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 55 B 3WL11 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 66 B 3WL12 08-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 66 B 3WL12 10-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 66 B 3WL12 12-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 66 B 3WL12 16-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 66 B 3WL12 20-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 66 B 3WL12 25-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 66 B 3WL12 32-2@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
2)
price
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
N
Siemens AG 2009
15/20
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
current
I
n max.

Rated current
1)

I
n

I
cu
up to 66/80 kA at 500 V,
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 80 B 3WL12 40-3@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
I 630 630 66 B 3WL11 06-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 800 800 66 B 3WL11 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 1000 66 B 3WL11 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1250 1250 66 B 3WL11 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1600 1600 66 B 3WL11 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 84.000
II 800 800 80 B 3WL12 08-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 80 B 3WL12 10-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 80 B 3WL12 12-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 80 B 3WL12 16-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 80 B 3WL12 20-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 80 B 3WL12 25-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 80 B 3WL12 32-3@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
S
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/21
Siemens LV 1 2009
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 72.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 76.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 82.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
II 4000 4000 100 B 3WL12 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 100 B 3WL13 50-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 6300 6300 100 B 3WL13 63-4@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000
II 800 800 100 B 3WL12 08-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1000 1000 100 B 3WL12 10-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1250 1250 100 B 3WL12 12-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 1600 1600 100 B 3WL12 16-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 2000 100 B 3WL12 20-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2500 2500 100 B 3WL12 25-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 123.000
II 3200 3200 100 B 3WL12 32-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
III 4000 4000 100 B 3WL13 40-4@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
2)
price
Electronic releases
6)
BB
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
H
Siemens AG 2009
15/22
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
page 15/24.
2)
cc
capacity I
cm
3)
point of the transformer are to be ordered separately, see page 15/34. The
internal current transformers for N conductors can be ordered by adding
the supplement "Z" and the order code "F23", see page 15/26.
4)
5)
6)
current
I
n max.
Rated current
1)

I
n
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Basic price
per PU
A A kA DT kg
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 115.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 106.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 108.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 4000 4000 130 B 3WL13 40-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 5000 5000 130 B 3WL13 50-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 190.000
III 6300 6300 130 B 3WL13 63-5@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 227.000
2)
price
AA Without
Electronic releases
3)
EB
3)
3)
4)
DG
3)5)
EG
3)5)
3)5)
C
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Options
15/23
Siemens LV 1 2009
Order No. supplement Additional
price
3WL 1 . . . - . . . . . -7777
Operating mechanisms
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1 Without
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical
and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable
for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
110 110 ... 125 2
230 220 3
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical
and electrical closing, closing solenoid suitable for
uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Motor Closing solenoid
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 230 220 4
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 110 110 ... 125 5
-- 24 -- 24 6
To order different voltages for
motorized operating mechanism and closing solenoid or
closing solenoid for synchronization purposes:
"1" at the 13th digit of the Order No. and order codes,
see page 15/25.
1st auxiliary release
Without 1st auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 x U
s
U
s
AC 50/60 Hz V U
s
V DC
-- 24 B
-- 30 C
-- 48 D
-- 60 E
110 110 ... 125 F
230 220 G
2nd auxiliary release
Without 2nd auxiliary release A Without
Shunt release suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
s
U
s
AC 50/60 Hz V U
s
V DC
-- 24 B
-- 30 C
-- 48 D
-- 60 E
110 110 ... 125 F
230 220 G
Undervoltage release, instantaneous (d 80 ms),
short-delay (d 200 ms)
s
U
s
AC 50/60 Hz V U
s
V DC
-- 24 J
-- 30 K
-- 48 L
-- 60 U
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 N
380 ... 415 -- P
Undervoltage release, can be delayed between 0.2 s and 3.2 s
s
U
s
AC 50/60 Hz V U
s
V DC
-- 48 Q
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 R
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 S
380 ... 415 -- T
Auxiliary switches
1st auxiliary switch block
2 NO + 2 NC 2 Without
1st + 2nd auxiliary switch block
4 NO + 4 NC 4
6 NO + 2 NC 7
5 NO + 3 NC 8
Siemens AG 2009
Options
15/24
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately,
specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
2)
Not necessary for circuit breakers with very high switching
capacity C as these circuit breakers can be used as standard up to
1150 V AC.
3)
Front connections are tinned as standard.
4)
The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
lower for a tin surface than for a silver surface.
Add "Z" to the complete Order No. and
indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Additional price
and additional order code(s)
@@@
+ . . . + . . .
Code for
"Further versions"Z
Operating manual
Printed version

In scope of supply of circuit breaker) French/Italian A 1 1
In scope of supply of circuit breaker) Spanish/Portuguese A 1 2
Rated voltage 1000 V AC/DC Add.
price
3-pole
Add.
price
4-pole
Only for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4")
Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1150 V AC order code "A15".
Size II
1)
Up to 2000 A A 0 5
2500 A A 0 5
3200 A A 0 5
Size III
1)2)
4000 A A 0 5
5000 A A 0 5
6300 A A 0 5
Rated voltage 1150 V AC/DC
Only for circuit breakers with high switching capacity H
(8th digit of the Order No. is a "4")
Cannot be combined with "Rated voltage 1000 V AC order code "A05".
Size II Up to 2000 A A 1 5
2500 A A 1 5
3200 A A 1 5
4000 A A 1 5
For size III select a circuit breaker with very high switching capacity C.
Tin-plated version of the customer's connections
on the guide frame
3)4)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or
flange connection. The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size I A 0 8
Size II A 0 8
Size III A 0 8
Special packaging Additional price
Special packaging for extended technical requirements
Cardboard packaging with wax coating (moisture protection),
internal bracing, tilt indicators
A 6 0
Rated current modules/rating plugs Additional price
Rated current
I
n

A
Only one module is possible per
circuit breaker (not in conjunction
with electronic release ETU15B).
As standard the overcurrent
releases are equipped with a
rated current module which is
equal to the maximum rated cir-
cuit breaker current (I
n max
). The
rated current of the selected
rated current module must be
smaller than I
n max
.
For size I, II 250 B 0 2 Without
315 B 0 3 Without
400 B 0 4 Without
500 B 0 5 Without
630 B 0 6 Without
800 B 0 8 Without
1000 B 1 0 Without
For size I, II, III 1250 B 1 2 Without
1600 B 1 6 Without
For size II, III 2000 B 2 0 Without
2500 B 2 5 Without
3200 B 3 2 Without
4000 B 4 0 Without
For size III 5000 B 5 0 Without
6300 B 6 3 Without
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Options
15/25
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Only possible with motorized operating mechanism.
2)
Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or
"F12".
3)
Only for circuit breakers with motorized operating mechanism, not possible
with order codes "C11", "C12".
4)
Not available for non-automatic air circuit breakers.
5)
Overexcited, i.e. opening time 50 ms (standard > 80 ms).
6)
Only possible if the 14th position of the Order No. for the circuit breaker is
"A", i.e. "without 1st auxiliary release".
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Additional price
@@@
+ . . . + . . .
Code for
"Further versions"Z
Indication/operator control elements, door sealing frames
5-digit mechanical operating cycles counter
1)
C 0 1
Electrical ON button
in the operator panel
2)

Possible only for circuit breakers with
closing solenoid.
Button with sealing cap C 1 1
Key operation with lock CES C 1 2
Storage status
signal switches
2)
(S21)
1 NO C 2 0
Ready-to-close signal switch (S20) 1 NO C 2 2
Signal switches
2)
For the first auxiliary release (S22) C 2 6
For the second auxiliary release (S23) C 2 7
Motor shutdown switch in the operator panel
3)
S 2 5
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of
the mechanical OFF pushbutton
S 2 4
Door sealing frames T 4 0
Reclosing lockouts and remote resets
Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout K 0 1
Tripped signal switch
2)4)
1 CO K 0 7
Remote reset solenoid for displays and reset buttons
including automatic reset of the reclosing lockout
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 K 1 0
-- 48 K 1 1
120 125 K 1 2
208 ... 250 208 ... 250 K 1 3
Motorized operating mechanisms and
closing/opening solenoids
Motorized operating mechanisms
Only possible if the 13th digit of the Order No. = "1"
Motor
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 ... 30 M 0 1
-- 48 ... 60 M 0 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 0 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 0 6
Closing solenoids suitable for uninterrupted duty, 100 % ON period
Activation solenoids
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 2 1
-- 30 M 2 2
-- 48 M 2 3
-- 60 M 2 4
110 110 M 2 5
230 220 M 2 6
Closing solenoids
5)
unsuitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 3 1
-- 48 M 3 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 3 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 3 6
Opening solenoids (shunt releases)
6)

not suitable for uninterrupted duty, 5 % ON period
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
-- 24 M 4 1
-- 48 M 4 3
110 ... 127 110 ... 125 M 4 5
208 ... 240 220 ... 250 M 4 6
Siemens AG 2009
Options
15/26
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
Padlocks not included in scope of supply.
2)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-
ify order code "F02" or "F12" for withdrawable circuit breaker only.
3)
Additional voltage transformers are required for connection of the measure-
ment function Plus, see page 15/43.
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Additional price
Code for
"Further versions" -Z
Order
code for
fixed-
mounted
version
Order code
for with-
drawable
version
Interlocks, covers, position indicator switches
@@@ @@@
Mutual mechanical
interlockings
(interlocking module
with Bowden wire 2 m)
Fixed-mounted circuit breaker
For withdrawable circuit breakers
with guide frame
For guide frames
For withdrawable circuit breakers
S
--
--
--
5 5 --
R
R
R
--
5
5
5
--
5
6
7
Arc chute covers
Not available for
- 1000 V version (order code "A05")
- DC version
- 4000 A size II
3-pole
Size I
Size II
Size III
--
--
--
R
R
R
1
1
1
0
0
0
4-pole
Size I
Size II
Size III
--
--
--
R
R
R
1
1
1
0
0
0
Shutters
2-part
lockable
with padlocks
1)
3-pole
Size I
Size II
Size III
--
--
--
R
R
R
2
2
2
1
1
1
4-pole
Size I
Size II
Size III
--
--
--
R
R
R
2
2
2
1
1
1
Position indicator switches
for guide frames
Connected
position
1 CO
3 CO
Test
position
1 CO
2 CO
Discon-
nected
position
1 CO
1 CO
--
--
R
R
1
1
5
6
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Additional price
@@@
+ . . . + . . .
Code for
Communication and measurement functions
Breaker status sensor (BSS) F 0 1
PROFIBUS communications interface
2)
Including COM15 and breaker
status sensor (BSS)
F 0 2
MODBUS communications interface
2)
Including COM16 and breaker
status sensor (BSS)
F 1 2
(without PROFIBUS/MODBUS communications interface)
3)
F 0 5
Overload and short-circuit protection for neutral conductors
Internal current transformers for
N conductors
Only possible with 4-pole circuit breakers
with ETU27B to ETU76B
Size I F 2 3
Size II F 2 3
Size III F 2 3
EMC filters
EMC filters Common-mode interference
suppressor filters (e.g. in IT net-
works, caused by frequency
converters)
Insertion loss (asymmetric) in
the range 40 kHz to 10 MHz
>40 dB.
F 3 1
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Options
15/27
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.
2)
Padlock not included in the scope of supply.
Add "Z" to the complete Order No.
and indicate the appropriate order
code(s).
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@ + . . . + . . .
Code for
Order code
for fixed-
mounted
version
Add. price
for fixed-
mounted ver-
sion
Order code
for with-
drawable
version
Add. price
for withdraw-
able version
Locking devices
@@@ @@@
Locking devices against
unauthorized closing,
The disconnector unit fulfills the
requirements for main circuit break-
ers acc. to EN 60204-1
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Assembly kit FORTRESS or Castell
1)
Assembly kit for padlocks
2)
Made by Ronis
Made by Profalux
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
5
7
8
9
S
S
S
S
S
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
5
7
8
9
EMERGENCY-STOP pushbuttons Mushroom pushbutton instead of
the mechanical OFF pushbutton
S 2 4 S 2 4
for withdrawable circuit breakers
requirements for main circuit
breakers acc. to EN 60204-1,
consisting of a lock in the cabinet
door, active in the connected
position;
the function is retained when the cir-
cuit breaker is replaced
Made by CES
Made by Ronis
Made by Profalux
--
--
--
R
R
R
6
6
6
1
8
0
Locking devices
for operating mechanism handles
with padlock
2)
S 3 3 S 3 3
Locking devices to prevent
movement of the withdrawable
circuit breakers
Safety lock for mounting on
the circuit breaker
Made by CES
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
--
--
--
S
S
S
7
7
7
1
5
6
Locking mechanisms
Locking mechanisms to prevent
circuit breaker in disconnected
positions,
consisting of Bowden wire and lock
in the cabinet door
Not possible in combination with
order code "R30" or "R50".
Made by CES
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
--
--
--
R
R
R
8
8
8
1
5
6
Locking mechanisms
order code "R81", "R85" or "R86".
To prevent opening of the cabinet door in:
ON position (fixed-mounted version)/
in connected position (withdrawable
version)
To prevent movement
with the cabinet door open
S
--
3 0 R
R
3
5
0
0
Connection methods for auxiliary conductors
Connections for screwless
terminals (tension spring)
N 6 1 P 6 1
Siemens AG 2009
Options
15/28
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
Only horizontal connection and vertical connection are available for circuit
breakers with very high switching capacity C.
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL . . . . - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
@@@
+ . . . + . . .
Code for
"Further versions"Z
For withdrawable circuit breakers with guide frames
or for guide frames
1)
Add. price
3-pole
Add. price
4-pole
To select this connection method,
the 12th digit of the Order No. for the
circuit breaker must be a "6"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top and bottom:
accessible from front,
single hole
Size I, up to 1600 A
Size II, up to 2000 A
Size III, up to 4000 A
P
P
P
P
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Top and bottom:
double hole
P
P
P
P
P
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1

Top:
horizontal,
double hole
Bottom:
single hole
P
P
P
P
P
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
7
7
7
Top:
vertical
Bottom:
horizontal
P
P
P
P
P
P
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
8
8
8
Top:
connecting flange
Bottom:
horizontal
P
P
P
P
P
1
1
1
1
1
9
9
9
9
9
Top:
horizontal
Bottom:
vertical
P
P
P
P
P
P
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
For fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Add. price
3-pole
Add. price
4-pole
To select this connection method,
the 12th digit of the Order No. for the
circuit breaker must be a "2"
Connection methods for main circuit connections
Top:
horizontal
Bottom:
single hole
N
N
N
N
N
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Top:
vertical
Bottom:
horizontal
N
N
N
N
N
N
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Top:
horizontal
Bottom:
vertical
N
N
N
N
N
N
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
Accessories and spare parts
15/29
Siemens LV 1 2009
Overview
Determination of the number of auxiliary supply connectors required
For ordering the auxiliary supply connectors see under
"Accessories and Spare Parts, Guide Frames for AC Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers", pages 15/30 to 15/33
and under "Accessories and Spare Parts, Auxiliary Conductor Connections, Auxiliary Supply Connectors", page 15/39.
This selection is only required if the guide frame is ordered under a
separate Order No.
The required number of auxiliary supply connectors
depends on:
Operating mechanism type
Electronic trip unit with/without current transformer
Type and number of auxiliary releases
Number of auxiliary switches
COM15/COM16 communication interface
Number of auxil-
iary supply
connectors
Terminal
a First auxiliary supply connector X6 always required. 1 X6
b
b1
b2
b3
Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical closing
Manual operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy feature with mechanical and electrical closing
0
0
+1
X6
X5
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
Electronic trip units
Electronic trip units ETU15B, ETU25B, ETU27B
Electronic trip units ETU45B, ETU76B (internal CubicleBUS)
Connections for external current transformers for overload protection in the N conductor and ground-fault protection
Current transformer installed in the N conductor (required with 3-pole circuit breakers if c2 is not selected)
Current transformer in the neutral point of the transformer (required if c2 or c3 is not selected)
0
+1
+1
+1
X8
X8
X8
d
d1
d2
Auxiliary releases
With/without 1st auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F1)
2nd auxiliary release (shunt trip unit F2, undervoltage trip unit F3, delayable undervoltage trip unit F4)
0
+1
X6
X5
e
e1
e2
Auxiliary switch blocks
1st auxiliary switch block 2 NO + 2 NC
1st and 2nd auxiliary switch block 4 NO + 4 NC or 6 NO + 2 NC or 5 NO + 3 NC (required if b3 or d2 is not selected)
0
+1
X6
X5
f
f1
f2
Communication modules
Without communication module COM15/COM16
With communication module COM15/COM16
occupies the entire terminal strip X7, making the following options no longer possible:
Tripped signal switch S24
Stored-energy status indication S21
Electrical ON button S10
Signaling switch on first and second auxiliary release S22 + S23
0
+1 X7
g
g1
g2
g3
g4
g5
g6
g7
g8
Optional signals/accessories
Tripped signal switch S24 (only possible if f2 is not selected)
Stored-energy status indication S21 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 is not selected)
Electrical ON button S10 (only possible if f2 is not selected, required if g1 or g2 is not selected)
Signal switch on first auxiliary release S22 (only possible if f2 is not selected,
required if g1, g2 or g3 is not selected)
Signal switch on second auxiliary release S23 (only possible if f2 is not selected,
required if g1, g2, g3 or g4 is not selected)
Ready-to-close indicator switch S20
Motor shutdown switch S12 (only possible if motorized operating mechanism is selected)
Remote reset solenoid F7 (required if c2 is not selected)
+1
+1
+1
+1
+1
0
0
+1
X7
X7
X7
X7
X7
X6
X5
X8
h Total number of auxiliary supply connectors (max. 4)
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
4
X8
X7
X6
X5
Siemens AG 2009
15/30
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Guide frames for AC circuit breakers/non-automatic air circuit breakers
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page.
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "Z" and the corresponding order code, see pages 15/24 to 15/24.
1) Front connections are tinned as standard.
2) The permissible temperature-rise limits according to IEC 60947-2 are 5 K
current
I
n max.

Switching
capacity
I
cu
DT Guide frames for 3-pole circuit breakers/
non-automatic air circuit breakers
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
(Order No. supplements
required according to
table below)
Basic price
per PU
A kA kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors Order No. supplements Add. price
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
For required number of auxiliary supply connectors,
see table on page 15/29
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Type of auxiliary circuit connections
Without
With screw connections (SIGUT)
With screwless connection method (tension spring)
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected position 1 CO contact,
test position 1 CO contact,
disconnected position 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected position 3 CO contacts,
test position 2 CO contacts,
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter,
2-part,
lockable
Size I
Size II
Size III
A
B
Without
and indicate the appropriate order code(s).
Order No. with "Z"
and additional order code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
Rated voltage 1000 V AC
Size II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H)
A 0 5
Size III, not necessary with with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Size II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide frame
1)2)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or flange connection
Size I A 0 8
Size II
A 0 8
Size III
A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/31
Siemens LV 1 2009
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see
the previous page.
current
I
n max.

Switching
capacity
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
table below)
Basic price
per PU
A kA kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 52.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 70.000
III 4000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-6AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
III 5000 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-7AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 63.000
III 6300 ... 150 B 3WL9 213-8AD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 74.000
Main circuit connection connecting flanges
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 25.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 39.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 45.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6AE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60.000
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Without
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
1
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter,
2-part,
lockable
Size I
Size II
Size III
A
B
Without
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
A 0 5
Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity
A 0 5
A 1 5
1)2)
Size I
A 0 8
Size II A 0 8
Size III
A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
15/32
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
For main circuit connection vertical and main circuit connecting flange see the following page.
current
I
n max.

Switching
capacity
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
table below)
Basic price
per PU
A kA kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000
III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BC@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 87.000
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Without
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
1
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter,
2-part,
lockable
Size I
Size II
Size III
A
B
Without
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
A 0 5
Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity
A 0 5
A 1 5
1)2)
Size I
A 0 8
Size II A 0 8
Size III
A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/33
Siemens LV 1 2009
For main circuit connection front, single hole, main circuit connection front, double hole, and main circuit connection horizontal see
the previous page.
current
I
n max.

Switching
capacity
I
cu
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
table below)
Basic price
per PU
A kA kg
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
II 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 62.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 5000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
III 6300 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 119.000
III 4000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-6BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 5000 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-7BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 88.000
III 6300 ... 130 B 3WL9 213-8BD@@-@@C1 1 1 unit 103 124.000
I 1000 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-1BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
I 1600 ... 100 B 3WL9 211-2BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 30.000
II 2000 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-3BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37.000
II 2500 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-4BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 47.000
II 3200 ... 100 B 3WL9 212-5BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 54.000
III 4000 ... 100 B 3WL9 213-6BE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84.000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Without
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
1
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter,
2-part,
lockable
Size I
Size II
Size III
A
B
Without
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 . . . . . . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
A 0 5
Size III, not necessary with circuit breakers with very high switching capacity A 0 5
Size II, except 4000 A (switching capacity H) A 1 5
1)2)
Size I A 0 8
Size II
A 0 8
Size III
A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
15/34
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5

1)
For replacement in existing circuit breakers please specify the circuit
breaker ID No. when ordering.
2)
With the rated current module selected, the maximum rated current I
n max
of
the circuit breaker must not be exceeded. The following applies I
n
d I
n max
.
3)
For direct measurement of the ground-fault current, e.g. in the neutral point
of the transformer, a 1200 A/1 A current transformer, class 1, is required.
The internal load of the SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 m. If the ground-fault cur-
rent is to be determined using the vectorial sum of the phases, a current
transformer must be installed in the neutral conductor.
Designation DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Protective devices with device holder and optional measurement
function
1)
Type With protection
function
Measurement function
ETU15B LI Without C 3WL9 311-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU25B LSI Without C 3WL9 312-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU27B LSING Without C 3WL9 312-7AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU45B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 314-5AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
(without
display)
With measurement
function Plus
B 3WL9 314-5AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
ETU76B LSIN(G) Without C 3WL9 317-6AA00-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
With measurement
function Plus
B 3WL9 317-6AA20-0AA2 1 1 unit 103 0.720
Rated current modules/Rating plugs
2)
For size Rated current I
n
(A)
I, II 250 B 3WL9 111-0AA51-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
315 B 3WL9 111-0AA52-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
400 B 3WL9 111-0AA53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
500 B 3WL9 111-0AA54-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
630 B 3WL9 111-0AA55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
800 B 3WL9 111-0AA56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
1000 B 3WL9 111-0AA57-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
I, II, III 1250 B 3WL9 111-0AA58-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
1600 B 3WL9 111-0AA61-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
II, III 2000 B 3WL9 111-0AA62-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
2500 B 3WL9 111-0AA63-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
3200 B 3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
4000 B 3WL9 111-0AA65-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
III 5000 B 3WL9 111-0AA66-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
6300 B 3WL9 111-0AA67-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.010
Ground-fault modules
3)
GFM AT 45B (only for ETU45B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
GFM AT 55B76B (only for ETU76B) alarm and tripping B 3WL9 111-0AT56-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
Displays
4-line displays for ETU45B B 3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
Current transformers for N conductor protection
Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
(not for ETU release 2) Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Internal transf. for N conductors Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Only for ETU release 2 Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Including wiring kit Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
External transf. for N conductors
(T5, see Technical Information
LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement
Method")
Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.300
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.380
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.680
External transf. for N conductors
With copper connection pieces
(T5, see Technical Information
LV 1 T, "Functions", "Measurement
Method")
Size I B 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 4.260
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.500
EMC filters
EMC filters
Common-mode interference sup-
pressor filters (e.g. in IT networks,
caused by frequency converters)
Insertion loss (asymmetric) in the
range 40 kHz to 10 MHz >40 dB
Not for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
Only for ETU release 2 X 3WL9 111-0AK34-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.280
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
6
1
0
b
3WL9 31.-.AA.0-0AA1
n = 3200 A
NSE0_00992b
3WL9 111-0AA64-0AA0
5 1
ALARM ALARM
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Jg (s) 12Jg
NSE0_01 027a
GFM AT 45B
TRIP
G A
B
C
D
E OFF
TRIP g
3WL9 111-0AT53-0AA0
NSE0_01 609
3WL9 111-0AT81-0AA0
NSE0_00990a
3WL9 111-0AA2.-0AA0
NSE0_00991 a
3WL9 111-0AA3.-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/35
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Can only be used in conjunction with "automatic reset of reclosing lockout",
e.g. "Z" + "K01", 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0.
2)
Required if communication is retrofitted.
3)
Locks must be ordered from the manufacturer.
4)
Padlock not included in the scope of supply.
Start of delivery on request.
per PU
PU
(UNI
T,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
More accessories for electronic releases
Sealable covers For ETU15B to
ETU45B
For ETU76
B
B
3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AT46-0AA0
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
0.050
0.050
Automatic reset of the reclosing lockout
Spare part for option K01, see "-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AK21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
Remote reset solenoids
1)
24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
For mechanical tripped indicator
Spare part for option K10 to K13, see
"-Z" + order code, page 15/25.
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AK04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
120 V AC/
125 V DC
B 3WL9 111-0AK05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
208-250 V AC/
208-250 V DC
B 3WL9 111-0AK06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
Retrofittable internal CubicleBUS
wiring for connection to terminal X8
(without male connector
2)
)
For ETU45B and
ETU76B
B 3WL9 111-0AK30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the
external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8
(without male connector, not for ETU release 2)
D 3WL9 111-0AK31-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Retrofittable internal wiring for connection of the
external N- and G-transformers to terminal X8
for ETU release 2 (without male connector)
D 3WL9 111-0AK33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Locking devices
Protective covers for
mechanical ON/OFF
Consisting of 2 transparent covers each
for sealing or for attaching padlocks
4)
,
cover with 6.35 mm hole (for tool actua-
tion), lock mount for safety lock for key
operation
Without safety lock
Made by CES
Made by IKON
B
B
B
3WL9 111-0BA21-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA24-0AA0
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
103
0.100
0.300
0.300
requirements for main circuit breakers
according to EN 60204-1
Spare part for option S01 to S09, see
Assembly kit
FORTRESS or
CASTELL
3)
Made by Ronis
Made by KIRK-
Key
Made by Profalux
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Assembly kit for
padlocks
4)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA33-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA34-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA35-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA36-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA38-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA41-0AA0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
103
103
103
103
103
0.200
0.400
0.270
0.250
0.200
0.200
0.360
for withdrawable circuit breakers
The disconnector unit fulfills the require-
ments for main circuit breakers accord-
ing to EN 60204-1, consisting of lock in
the cabinet door, active in connected
position; function is retained when circuit
breaker is replaced
Spare part for option R60, R61, R68, see
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Made by KIRK-
Key
Made by Ronis
Made by Profalux
B
B
B
B
B
3WL9 111-0BA51-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA57-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA58-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA50-0AA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
103
103
103
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.300
0.227
Locking devices for operating mecha-
nism handle with padlock
4)

Spare part for option S33, see
B 3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
Locking devices against movement of
the withdrawable circuit breakers
Safety lock for mounting on the circuit
breaker.
Spare part for opt. S71, S75, S76,
see "-Z" + order code, page 15/27.
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
Made by KIRK-
Key
B
B
B
B
B
3WL9 111-0BA73-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA75-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA77-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA80-0AA0
1
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
103
103
103
0.300
0.200
0.300
0.300
0.400
Interlocking systems
2 of the same keys for 3 switches,
Locking device OFF position,
Key-operated switch on operator panel.
A maximum of 2 switches can be
switched on.
Made by CES B 3WL9 111-0BA43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
ETU25B
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
8
3
b
3WL9 111-0AT45-0AA0
F7
NSE0_00999a
3WL9 111-0AK0.-0AA0
N
S
E
0
0
9
8
0
3WL9 111-0BA22-0AA0
NSE00981
3WL9 111-0BA31-0AA0
NSE00982
3WL9 111-0BA53-0AA0
NSE00984
3WL9 111-0BA71-0AA0
NSE00986
3WL9 111-0BA76-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
15/36
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Locking mechanisms
Interlocking
To prevent movement of the
withdrawable circuit breakers
in disconnected position,
consisting of Bowden wire and
lock in the cabinet door
Spare part for option R81, R85,
R86, see "-Z" + order code,
page 15/27.
"Locking mechanism to prevent
opening of the cabinet door"
(order code "R30") or "Locking
mechanism to prevent move-
ment with the cabinet door open"
(order code "R50").
Made by CES
Made by IKON
Made by Profalux
Made by Ronis
B
B
B
B
3WL9 111-0BA81-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA85-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BA86-0AA0
1
1
1
1
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
1 unit
103
103
103
103
0.800
0.800
0.800
0.800
To prevent opening of the
cabinet door in ON position
(can be defeated)
Spare part for option S30, see
Fixed mounting B 3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600
To prevent opening of the
cabinet door
(can be defeated)
Spare part for option R30, see
circuit breakers in disconnected
position" (order codes "R81",
"R85" or "R86").
Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
To prevent movement with the
cabinet door open
circuit breakers in disconnected
position" (order codes "R81",
"R85" or "R86").
Guide frames B 3WL9 111-0BB15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Interlocks
Mutual mechanical
interlocking,
with 2000 mm Bowden wire
(one required for each circuit
breaker)
Fixed-mounted circuit
breaker
Spare part for option
S55, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.700
Module for withdrawable
circuit breaker with frame
R55, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.130
When ordered separately
Module for guide frame
code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB22-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
Module for withdrawable
circuit breaker
code, page 15/26.
B 3WL9 111-0BB23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Adapter for size III
Withdrawable circuit
breaker
B 3WL9 111-0BB30-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Couplings on the circuit
breaker (with ring) for
mutual interlocking
Can be used in all circuit
breakers
B 3WL9 112-8AH47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.160
Bowden wires 2000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
3000 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.220
4500 mm B 3WL9 111-0BB47-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
NSE00987
3WL9 111-0BA83-0AA0
3WL9 111-0BB12-0AA0
NSE00989
3WL9 111-0BB21-0AA0
NSE0_01886
3WL9 112-8HA47-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/37
Siemens LV 1 2009
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Test devices
Manual testers release 2 for electronic releases ETU15B
to ETU76B
For testing the electronic release functions
B 3WL9 111-0AT32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
Function testers C 3WL9 111-0AT44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.210
For testing the tripping characteristics for
electronic release ETU15B
to ETU76B
Capacitor storage devices
Capacitor storage devices
For shunt release
Storage time 5 min
Rated control supply voltage
must match the rated control
supply voltage of the shunt
release
Rated control supply
voltage/rated opera-
tional voltage
AC 50/60 Hz V V DC
220 ... 240 220 ...
250
B 3WL9 111-0BA14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.520
Suitable also for
3VL and 3WN circuit breakers
Siemens AG 2009
15/38
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
Not possible with communications interface option, order code "F02" or
"F12".
2)
X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames.
If this is not already available, please order additionally
(see pages 15/29 and 15/39).
3)
Only in conjunction with motorized operating mechanism.
4)
Not possible with motor shutdown switch.
5)
Not possible with electrical ON button.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Indicators, control elements
Ready-to-close signal-
ing switches
1 NO contact
Spare part for option C22,
see "-Z" + order code,
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Signaling switches
1)2)
Spare part for option C26
and C27, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/25.
1st or 2nd auxiliary
releases
B 3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Tripped signaling
switches
1)2)
1 CO
Spare part for option K07,
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
Operating cycles
counters, mechanical
3)
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Stored energy status
signaling switches
1)2)
1 NO contact
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AH08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
Position signaling
switches for guide
frames
Spare part for option R15
and R16, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/26.
1st block (3 CO
contacts)
B 3WL9 111-0AH11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.200
2nd block (6 CO
contacts)
B 3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
Electrical ON buttons
1)4)
(button+wiring)
2)
,
for operator panel.
Possible only for circuit
breakers with closing
solenoid.
Spare part for option C11
and C12, see "-Z" + order
code, page 15/25.
With sealing cap B 3WL9 111-0AJ02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
With CES assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
With BKS assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
With IKON assembly kit B 3WL9 111-0AJ05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
Motor shutdown
switches
5)
(mounting on
operator panel)
Spare part for option S25,
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0AJ06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
EMERGENCY-STOP
pushbuttons
Mushroom pushbutton
instead of the mechanical
OFF pushbutton
Spare part for option S24,
page 15/25.
B 3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
NSE0_00993a
3WL9 111-0AH01-0AA0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
9
4
b
3WL9 111-0AH02-0AA0
NSE0_00995a
3WL9 111-0AH07-0AA0
NSE0_00996a
3WL9 111-0AH12-0AA0
NSE0 00997a
3WL9 111-0AJ0.-0AA0
NSE00985
3WL9 111-0BA72-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/39
Siemens LV 1 2009
For a complete auxiliary current connection you must order:
Fixed-mounted version: $ + % + &
Withdrawable version: $ + ( + %
or
$ + )
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary conductor connections
Male connectors for circuit breakers $ B 3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
Extension for the 1000 V
male connector versions
(male connector must be ordered separately)
B 3WL9 111-0AB02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.150
Male connectors and extension for 1000 V B 3WL9 111-0AB10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
Auxiliary supply connec-
tors for circuit breakers or
guide frames%
Screw connection
(SIGUT)
B 3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
Screwless connection
method (tension
spring)
B 3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
Coding kits for fixed-mounted version
(X5 to X8) &
B 3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
Sliding contact modules for guide frames ( B 3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.100
One-part sliding contact modules for guide
frames
Screw connection (SIGUT))
B 3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
Blanking blocks for circuit breakers B 3WL9 111-0AB12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.030
N
S
E
0
0
9
7
8
3WL9 111-0AB01-0AA0
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
2
6
8
3WL9 111-0AB03-0AA0
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
2
6
9
3WL9 111-0AB04-0AA0
N
S
E
0
0
9
7
4
3WL9 111-0AB07-0AA0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
7
a
3WL9 111-0AB08-0AA0
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
8
6
3WL9 111-0AB18-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
15/40
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
X7 manual connector required for circuit breakers or guide frames.
If this is not already available, please order additionally
(see pages 15/29 and 15/39).
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Auxiliary releases
Closing solenoids/shunt releases
24 V DC 100 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
110 ... 125 V DC/110 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 V DC/230 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
24 V DC 5 % ON period B 3WL9 111-0AD11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AD12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AD14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
Undervoltage releases
Instantaneous
24 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.730
Delayed
48 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AE11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
380 ... 415 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AE14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.740
Motorized operating
mechanisms
1)
24 ... 30 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
48 ... 60 V DC B 3WL9 111-0AF02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
110 ... 125 V DC/110 ... 127 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
220 ... 250 V DC/208 ... 240 V AC B 3WL9 111-0AF04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.510
Auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary switch blocks 2 NO + 2 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.180
2 NO B 3WL9 111-0AG02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.080
1 NO + 1 NC B 3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
3WL9 111-0AD06-0AA0
NSE01001
3WL9 111-0AE0.-0AA0
NSE01002
3WL9 111-0AE1.-0AA0
I
NSE0_01 003a
3WL9 111-0AF0.-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AG03-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/41
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Not available for 1000 V version, 1150 V version, DC version and size II
with rated circuit breaker current of 4000 A.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Door sealing frames, covers, shutters
Door sealing frames
Spare part for option T40, see
B 3WL9 111-0AP01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.360
Protective covers, IP55
cannot be used in conjunction with
door sealing frames, cover remov-
able and can be opened on both
sides
B 3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
Shutters
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.630
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP07-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.860
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AP08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.600
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AP11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.770
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AP12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.070
Arc chutes
Arc chutes
690 V Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.110
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.680
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AS03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.980
1000 V/1150 V Size II B 3WL9 111-0AS05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.140
Arc chute covers
1)
Assembly kit for guide frame
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS32-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0AS42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.340
Withdrawable part coding
Withdrawable part coding B 3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.400
By customer, for 36 coding variants
NSE0_01028a
3WL9 111-0AP02-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AP0.-0AA0
N
S
E
0
1
0
0
7
3WL9 111-0AS0.-0AA0
NSE01008
3WL9 111-0AS3.-0AA0
NSE01009
3WL9 111-0AR12-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
15/42
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
For 60 kA ground short-circuit current, order 2.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Ground-fault protection
Ground-fault protection between
the guide frame and the
For 30 kA ground short-circuit
current
1)
Contacting module for guide frame
Size I, II B 3WL9 111-0BA01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.330
Size III B 3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
Contacting modules for
3-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.250
Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.530
4-pole Size I B 3WL9 111-0BA08-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.500
Size II B 3WL9 111-0BA04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.850
Support brackets
Support brackets
For mounting fixed-mounted circuit breakers
on vertical plane, only for sizes I and II
(1 set = 2 units)
B 3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 7.000
NSE0 01018a
3WL9 111-0BA02-0AA0
NSE01019
3WL9 111-0BA07-0AA0
N
S
E
-
0
1
0
2
2
3WL9 111-0BB50-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/43
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Each CubicleBUS module is supplied with a 0,2 m factory-fitted cable to
connect the modules with each other. A longer factory-fitted cable is
required for connection to the circuit breaker.
2)
Manual for MODBUS communication solution available on request.
3)
A 24 V DC power supply unit is required.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
CubicleBUS modules
1)
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch,
relay outputs
B 3WL9 111-0AT26-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Digital output modules, configurable, relay outputs B 3WL9 111-0AT20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.310
Digital input modules B 3WL9 111-0AT27-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Analog output modules B 3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Zone Selective Interlocking modules B 3WL9 111-0AT21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.240
Parameterization systems
Breaker Data
Adapters
(BDA)
3)
Parameterization, operation, monitoring and
diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers
using the local interface; Breaker Data
Adapter, connection cable to the SENTRON
3WL circuit breaker and to the programming
device (e.g. notebook); can be run with
Internet Explorer with JAVA2 VM 1.4.0-01 and
higher
B 3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.900
BDA Plus
3)
Same as BDA, but with additional Ethernet
interface for connection to Ethernet/Intra-
net/Internet
B 3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200
Connection
cables for BDA
Plus
Connection cable for connection of BDA Plus
to terminal X8 of the SENTRON 3WL circuit
breaker. Required if neither COM15 nor
COM16 nor other external
CubicleBUS modules are available,
length 2 m.
B 3WL9 111-0BC21-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.350
Switch ES
Power
parameteriza-
tion
software
Calibration, operation, monitoring, and diag-
nostics of SENTRON circuit breakers via
PROFIBUS DP; runs under Windows 95,
Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and
Windows XP Professional, requires additional
PROFIBUS card e.g. CP5613
A 3ZS2 311-0CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 133 0.200
Accessories for communications
Preassembled
cables for
CubicleBUS
modules
0.2 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL
with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.020
1 m long, for connection to SENTRON 3WL
with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.050
with COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.060
without COM15/COM16
B 3WL9 111-0BC05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.070
SENTRON
manuals for
communication
solutions
2)
Detailed description of the communication
functions for SENTRON circuit breakers incl.
installation, connection, commissioning, data
transmission to PLC as well as description of
Switch ES Power and BDA.
English Token fee on request A5E0151353-01
German Token fee on request A5E0151347-01
To be ordered from:
http://www.click4business-supplies.de
Free download from:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
Voltage
transformers,
3-pole, for
SENTRON 3WL
with measure-
ment function
Plus
380 ... 690 V/100 V, class 0.5 B 3WL9 111-0BB68-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.600
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
NSE0_01 023a
3WL9 111-0AT23-0AA0
NSE0_01 024a
3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
15/44
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
If retrofitted, a measuring accuracy of 3 % is achieved.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET,
M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Retrofitting and spare parts for communication
PROFIBUS
retrofit kits
Retrofit kit for PROFIBUS communications
including COM15, BSS and set of cables for
all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with
ETU45B and ETU76B releases
B 3WL9 111-0AT12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
COM15
PROFIBUS
modules
B 3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
MODBUS
retrofit kits
Retrofit kit for MODBUS communications
including COM16, BSS and set of cables for
all SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with
ETU45B and ETU76B releases
B 3WL9 111-0AT14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.260
COM16
MODBUS
modules
B 3WL9 111-0AT17-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.140
Breaker
status sensor
(BSS)
B 3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.120
Measurement
function Plus
1)
For all ETUs except ETU release 2
(voltage transformer required)
B 3WL9 111-0AT03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
Measurement
function Plus
1)

For ETU release 2
(voltage transformer required)
B 3WL9 111-0AT04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.250
All communication components, CubicleBUS modules and measurement functions are available for the ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
PROFIBUS DP
Device
CubicleBus
NSE-01025
3WL9 111-0AT15-0AA0
S44
S41
S40
S45
S43
S42
NSE01026
3WL9 111-0AT16-0AA0
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/45
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
In the case of vertical connection size I, up to 1000 A
one 3WL9 1110AM01-0AA0 vertical connection is required,
up to 1600 A two 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 vertical connections
are required.
2)
In the case of vertical connection size II, up to 2500 A
one 3WL9 1110AM02-0AA0 vertical connection is required,
up to 3200 A two 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 vertical connections
are required.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Main conductor connections,
fixed mounting (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
single hole at top
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.100
Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AL02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.600
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.000
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.100
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
single hole at
bottom
B
3WL9 111-0AL55-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.000
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
acc. to DIN 43673,
double hole at top
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
acc. to DIN43673,
double hole at
bottom
Rear vertical
main circuit
connections
Size I
1)
, up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.500
Size II
2)
, up to 3200 A B 3WL9 111-0AM02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
Size III, up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.000
3WL9 111-0AL06-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL56-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL14-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AL64-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AM03-0AA0
NSE-01010
NSE-01011
NSE-01012
Siemens AG 2009
15/46
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
1)
When using front-accessible main circuit connections
(withdrawable circuit breakers) supports are required.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Main conductor connections,
withdrawable versions (essential accessory)
Specified for each connection
3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
single hole at top
or at bottom
1)
Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.000
Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.300
Size II, up to 2000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.800
Size III, up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.200
3WL9 111-0AN14-0AA0
Front-accessible
main circuit
connections,
acc. to DIN 43673,
double hole at top
or at bottom
1)
3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0
Supports
for front and DIN
connecting bars
3-pole for 3 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN41-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.700
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN42-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.350
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN43-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.420
4-pole for 4 bars Size I B 3WL9 111-0AN44-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 1.200
Size II B 3WL9 111-0AN45-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 2.200
Size III B 3WL9 111-0AN46-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 3.200
Rear vertical
main circuit
connections
3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0
(3 busbar connection
pieces for 3-pole circuit
breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN23-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 19.170
breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN20-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.410
breakers)
B 3WL9 111-0AN10-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 18.300
Rear
horizontal
circuit connections
Size I, 1250 to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AN33-0AA0 1 1 unit 103
0.770
Size II, up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AN35-0AA0 1 1 unit 103
1.240
3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0
Connecting flanges Size I, up to 1000 A B 3WL9 111-0AN24-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 0.610
NSE-01013
NSE-01014
NSE-01017
NSE-01015
N
S
E
-
0
1
0
1
6
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/47
Siemens LV 1 2009
1)
Please specify the circuit breaker ID No. in plain text when ordering.
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Conversion sets
For converting fixed-mounted circuit breakers into withdrawable circuit breakers
Guide frames and sliding contact modules must be ordered separately.
Number of poles Size
3-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC11-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.100
II B 3WL9 111-0BC12-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 5.900
III B 3WL9 111-0BC13-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 8.100
4-pole I B 3WL9 111-0BC14-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.400
II B 3WL9 111-0BC15-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 6.450
III B 3WL9 111-0BC16-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 10.700
Main contact elements
You must specify the circuit breaker ID No. when ordering!
Specified for each connection (depending on the number of poles on the circuit breaker,
order 3 or 4 units)
Sizes I
n max
Order No. is automatically adapted
to the circuit breaker ID number
I Up to 1600 A B 3WL9 111-0AM90 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y
1)
II Up to 2500 A B 3WL9 111-0AM91 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y
1)
II Up to 4000 A B 3WL9 111-0AM92 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y
1)
III Up to 6300 A B 3WL9 111-0AM93 1 1 unit 103 On req.
L1Y
1) NSE-01021
Siemens AG 2009
15/48
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Conversion for the following applications is possible
Schematics in as-supplied state Version Size DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Withdrawable short-circuits, grounding and bridging units
Top and
bottom
parts of
system
are
short-
circuited
and
grounded
3-pole
Up to
1600 A
I C 3WL9 111-0BD01-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 30.000
Up to
3200 A
II C 3WL9 111-0BD03-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 40.500
Up to
6300 A
III C 3WL9 111-0BD05-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 65.000
4-pole
Up to
1600 A
I C 3WL9 111-0BD02-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 35.000
Up to
3200 A
II C 3WL9 111-0BD04-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 46.000
Up to
6300 A
III C 3WL9 111-0BD06-0AA0 1 1 unit 103 70.000
NSE0_01113
L1 L2 L3 N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
8
N L1 L2 L3
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
9
(as-supplied state)
Top and bottom parts of system are short-circuited and grounded
(as-supplied state)
Top part of system is short-circuited and grounded,
infeed from bottom
Withdrawable bridging unit, infeed and outgoing terminals are permanently
connected to each other
Bottom part of system is short-circuited and grounded,
infeed from top
NSE0_01113
L1 L2 L3 N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
8
N L1 L2 L3
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
9
NSE0_01112
L1 L2 L3
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
6
N L1 L2 L3
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
7
NSE0_01115
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
2
2
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
2
3
a
NSE0_01114
L1 L2 L3
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
2
0
L1 L2 L3 N
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
2
1
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/49
Siemens LV 1 2009
Options
Structure of the Order No.
Accessories: with first order (components are already mounted)
Accessories: for retrofitting (components for subsequent fitting)
Documentation
Free download of documentation from
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/manuals
More information
Up-to-date information on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/sentron
3WL1
An important prerequisite for computer-

based order processing is that order
numbers must be structured according
to standardized criteria.
They are used as an unambiguous
means of communication for various
purposes:
Offer processing
Selection and configuration
Order processing
Ordering
Order confirmation
Handling warehouse products
Order processing at the
supply bases
Delivery and shipment
Reporting and
planning
Service and warranty
The standardized structure ensures that
only one Order No. has to be adminis-
tered for one device.
This saves time and effort during
planning, configuring, ordering
and stock keeping, and consequently
above all it saves costs.
The example opposite explains the
various positions within an
Order No.
Example
5th position: Size Size II
6th and 7th
positions:
Max. rated
circuit breaker
current I
n max
I
n max
= 2000 A
8th position: Switching capacity
class
High breaking capacity
"H": 100 kA
9th position: Electronic releases ETU76B with pixel graphics

display
10th position: Electronic release

supplement
... with ground-fault protection
11th position: Number of poles 3-pole
12th position: Installation type Fixed mounting, main circuit
connections on rear, vertical
13th position: Operating

mechanisms
Manual operating mechanism
with mechanical closing
14th position: 1st auxiliary release Shunt release

AC 50/60 Hz 110 V
15th position: 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release

16th position: Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC
Example 3WL1 Additional accessory components can
be ordered ready-mounted.
These supplements are identified
by "-Z".
Even with additional components,
one Order No. is sufficient.
"Z" with order code Communications interface
"Standard" + Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
+ communication module COM15 for
connection to PROFIBUS DP

Example Additional accessories which are not
intended to be ready-mounted in the
factory, such as spare parts for storage,
can also be ordered separately from
the circuit breaker.
Accessories for retrofitting are identified
by the Order No. stem 3WL9.
3WL9
Protective cover for mechanical ON/OFF

without lock
Operating manual
Complete set
German/English Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AN1 Delivery time class C
French/Italian Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AJ1 On request
Spanish/Portuguese Order No. 3ZX18 12-0WL00-0AL1 On request
Manual
Communication
German Order No. A5E0151347-01
English Order No. A5E0151353-01
Siemens AG 2009
3WL Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
3- and 4-pole, fixed-mounted versions
15/50
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
For general data see page 15/6.
Note:
For voltages over 600 V use the version for 1000 V DC rated volt-
age: Order with "-Z" and order code "A05".
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "Z"
and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit break-
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "
Options", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
Provisions to dissipate heat must be made on the line side.
2)
For permissible rated short-time current Icw and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity I
cc
for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical
Information LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
An external overload and short-circuit protection device is avail-
able from the company "mat" for the SENTRON 3WL non-auto-
matic air circuit breakers.
Available only directly from the company "mat" Maschinen- und
Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External Partners").
current
I
n max.
DT 3-pole non-automatic
air circuit breakers
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Price
per PU
A kg
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@32-.... 1 1 unit 103 64,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@31-.... 1 1 unit 103 85,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@33-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@34-.... 1 1 unit 103 56,000
2)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing 1AA2 Without
DC
current
I
n max.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Price
per PU
A kg
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@42-.... 1 1 unit 103 77,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 75,000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@41-.... 1 1 unit 103 103,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@43-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@44-.... 1 1 unit 103 67,000
2)
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL1 2 . 0 8 . . . . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
3-pole 4-pole
Rated voltage 1000 V DC
DC
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/51
Siemens LV 1 2009

Note:
age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-
tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
2)
cw
and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity I
cc
for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-
mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3)
4)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately,
specify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External
Partners").
current
I
n max.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Price
per PU
A kg
(for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 60.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@35-.... 1 1 unit 103 68.000
With guide frames,
horizontal main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@36-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
With guide frames,
vertical main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@37-.... 1 1 unit 103 121.000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 91.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@38-.... 1 1 unit 103 113.000
2)
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL1 2 . 0 8 . . 3 . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
3-pole
Size II
4)
Up to 2000 A A 0 5
Size II
4)
Up to 4000 A A 0 5
3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection.
The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A 0 8
DC
Siemens AG 2009
15/52
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
Note:
age; order with "-Z" and order code A05.
ers/non-automatic air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Op-
tions", page 15/24 onwards.
1)
2)
cw
and rated short-circuit switch-
ing capacity I
cc
for non-automatic air circuit breakers, see Technical Infor-
mation LV 1T, "General Data", "Technical specifications".
3)
4)
If ordering withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame separately, spec-
ify order code "A05" for withdrawable circuit breaker and guide frame.
Anlagentechnik (for address see "Appendix, External
Partners").
current
I
n max.
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
see page 15/23
Price
per PU
A kg
(for guide frames, see page 15/53)
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103 75.000
82.000 II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@45-.... 1 1 unit 103
With guide frames,
horizontal main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@46-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
With guide frames,
vertical main circuit connection
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@47-.... 1 1 unit 103 146.000
II 1000 B 3WL12 10-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 2000 B 3WL12 20-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 109.000
II 4000
1)
B 3WL12 40-8@@48-.... 1 1 unit 103 136.000
2)
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL1 2 . 0 8 . . 4 . . . . . Z
@@@
Additional
price
4-pole
Size II
4)
Up to 2000 A A 0 5
Size II
4)
Up to 4000 A A 0 5
3)
Only for circuit breakers in withdrawable version with horizontal connection or flange connection.
The normal delivery time increases to 15 work days.
Size II A 0 8
DC
Siemens AG 2009
1
5
15/53
Siemens LV 1 2009
Guide frames for DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
Guide frames for 4-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-
Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.
Size Max. rated circuit breaker current
I
n max
DT For 3-pole non-automatic
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
table below)
Price
per PU
A kg
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DD@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 31,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6DE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 60,000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors 3-pole
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Without
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected 1 CO contact,
test 1 CO contact,
disconnected 1 CO contact
1
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,
test 2 CO contacts,
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter, 2 parts, lockable
A
B
Without
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 2 . . . . . . . A1 Z
@@@
Add.
price
Size II A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide
frame
1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or
flange connection
Size II A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
Accessories and Spare Parts
15/54
Siemens LV 1 2009
1
5
For guide frames for 3-pole DC non-automatic air circuit breakers see previous page
All other accessory parts must be ordered by specifying "Z" and the corresponding order code, see "3WL Air circuit breakers/Non-
Automatic Air circuit breakers up to 6300 A (AC)", "Options", page 15/24 onwards.

Size Max. rated circuit breaker current
I
n max
DT For 4-pole non-automatic
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No.
table below)
Price
per PU
A kg
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EA@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EB@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EC@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6ED@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
II 2000 B 3WL9 212-3EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 37,000
II 4000 B 3WL9 212-6EE@@-@@A1 1 1 unit 103 84,000
Number of auxiliary supply connectors 4-pole
Without
1 connector
2 connectors
3 connectors
4 connectors
0
1
2
3
4
Without
Without
0
1
2
Without
Without 0 Without
Option 1 Connected 1 CO contact,
test 1 CO contact,
1
Option 2 Connected 3 CO contacts,
test 2 CO contacts,
2
Shutters
Without
With shutter, 2 parts, lockable
A
B
Without
Order No. with "Z"
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3WL9 2 1 2 . . . . . . . A1 Z
@@@
Add.
price
Size II A 0 5
Tinned version of the customer's connections on the guide
frame
1)
Only for guide frames with horizontal connection or
flange connection
Size II A 0 8
Siemens AG 2009
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
15
1
5
15/2 Introduction
3WL Air Circuit Breakers/
Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers
up to 6300 A (AC)
General data
15/6 - Design
15/12 - Function
15/19 - Configuration
15/24 - Technical specifications
Project planning aids
15/32 - Characteristic curves
15/34 - Dimensional drawings
15/47 - Schematics
15/49 - More information
3WL Non-Automatic Air
Circuit Breakers up to 4000 A (DC)
General data
15/50 - Technical specifications
15/51 - Characteristic curves
15/51 - Dimensional drawings
15/55 - Schematics
15/56 - More information
SENTRON Switching and
Protection Devices
Air Circuit Breakers
Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
15/2
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Overview
Standard
-- Not available
Optional
1)
according to UL 489 up to 5000 A, see Catalog LV 16.
Air circuit breakers
up to 6300 A (AC)
3WL non-automatic air circuit breakers
up to 4000 A (DC)
Size I, II, III II
Rated current I
n
A 630, 800, 1000, 1250,
1600, 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000,
5000, 6300
1000, 2000, 4000
Number of poles 3-pole, 4-pole 3-pole, 4-pole
Rated operational
voltage U
e
V AC
V DC
Up to 690/1000/1150
--
--
Up to 1000
Rated ultimate
short-circuit breaking
capacity at 500 V AC
kA
Size I
55/66
Size II
66/80/100
Size III
100/150 (3-pole),
130 (4-pole)
30/25/20
(at 300/600/1000 V DC)
Endurance Operat-
ing cycles
20000 15000 10000 15000
Mounting position
Degree of protection
With cover IP55 IP55
Without cover
(with door sealing frame)
IP41 IP41
Dimensions 3-/4-pole
W mm 320/410 460/590 704/914 460/590
H mm 434 434 434 434
D mm
H mm
D mm
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
291
465.5
471
Type ETU15B
1)
ETU25B ETU27B ETU45B ETU76B
Solid-state releases for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Overload protection
Short-time delayed
--
Instantaneous

Ground-fault protection -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking -- -- --
LCD, 4-line -- -- -- --
LCD, graphic -- -- -- --
Communication through
PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS
-- -- --
Selectable parameter sets -- -- -- --
Parameters freely programmable -- -- -- --
CubicleBUS -- -- --
Size III Size II Size I
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSS0_00535
H
W D
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
6
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
7
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
8
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
9
a
Rating Plug
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
1
1
a
Fixed
mounting
Withdrawable
Siemens AG 2009
15/3
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
Introduction
1
5
Switching capacity
1)
Size II with I
n max
d 2500 A.
2)
Size II with I
n max
= 3200 A and I
n max
= 4000 A.
3)
cw
greater than the I
cu
or I
cs
value at 690 V.
4)
e
= 1150 V.
Size I II III
Switching capacity class N

S

N

S

H

H

C
3-pole
C
4-pole
e

up to 415 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 500 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 690 V AC
I
cu
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cs
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cm
kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
e

up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
I
cu
kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cs
kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cm
kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 154
4)
154
4)
cw

3)
0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 65
1)
/70
2)
80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 50
1)
/65
2)
65 65 65
cc

Up to
500 V AC
kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to
690 V AC
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical
specifications by orange backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
Siemens AG 2009
Introduction
15/4
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
SENTRON 3WL:
Superior individual products integrated into uniform power
distribution systems up to and including industry-specific
industrial and infrastructure solutions
$ Guide frame
% Main circuit connection, front, flange, horizontal, vertical
& Position indicator switch
( Grounding contact, leading
) Shutter
* COM15 PROFIBUS module or COM16 MODBUS module
+ External CubicleBUS modules
, Closing solenoid, auxiliary release
- Auxiliary conductor plug-in system
. Auxiliary switch block
/ Door sealing frame
0 Interlocking set for base plate
1 Transparent panel, function insert
2 EMERGENCY-STOP pushbutton, key operated
3 Motorized operating mechanism
4 Operating cycles counter
5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
6 Protective devices with device holder, solid-state releases (ETU)
7 Remote reset solenoid
8 Breaker Data Adapter (BDA)
9 Four-line display
: Ground-fault protection module
; Rated current module
< Measuring function module
= Circuit breaker
18
17
16
20
15
21
23
22
24
14
19
6
4
5
7
8
9
2
25
10
11
12
13
3
1
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
8
7
a
Siemens AG 2009
15/5
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
Introduction
1
5
Communication-capable circuit breakers (with ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)
Features
Coordinated communication concept using the PROFIBUS DP
or MODBUS, ranging from 16 A to 6300 A with SENTRON 3VL
and SENTRON 3WL
The high level of modularity of circuit breakers and accessories
allows easy retrofitting of all communication components
Significant additional benefits for the switchboard due to the
possibility of linking up external input and output modules to
the circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS of the SENTRON 3WL
Innovative software products for parameterization, operation,
monitoring, and diagnostics of SENTRON circuit breakers,
both locally or via PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS or Ethernet/
Intranet/Internet
Complete integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into the
Totally Integrated Power and Totally Integrated Automation
solutions
Communication:
For air circuit breakers with optional communication function
(ETU45B or ETU76B solid-state release)
see Catalog LV 1.
For accessories see Catalog LV 1.
For more information see also the Chapter "Power
Management System" and "Software for Power Distribution".
5
1
21
22
19
8 6
2
4
20
14 15 16 17 18 7
9
1
3
10
11
12
13
SENTRON 3VL
Electronic LCD ETU release
COM10 PROFIBUS module complete with ZSI
2)
complete with ZSI
BDA Plus with Ethernet interface
Browser-capable input and output device (e.g. notebook)
SENTRON 3WL
1)
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
ZSI module
Digital output module with relay contacts
Digital output module with relay contacts, configurable
Switch ES Power on PC
PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC powercontrol
PAC
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
1
0
5
h
PROFIBUS
Ethernet
CubicleBUS
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/6
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Design
Overview of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers/
Versions
Rated currents: 630 A to 6300 A
3 sizes for different rated current ranges (see illustration
"Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic
Circuit Breakers")
3- and 4-pole versions
Rated operational voltage up to 690 V AC and 1000 V DC.
Special versions up to 1000 V AC and 1150 V AC available
4 different switching capacity classes in the range from 55 kA
to 150 kA for AC applications and one switching capacity
class for DC applications.
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are supplied complete with
operating mechanism (manual operating mechanism with me-
chanical closing), solid-state release and auxiliary switches
(2 NO contacts + 2 NC contacts in the standard version), and
can be equipped with auxiliary releases.
Installation types
Fixed-mounted or withdrawable version
Ambient temperatures
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are climate-proof according
to IEC 60068-2-30. They are intended for use in enclosed areas
where no severe operating conditions (e. g. dust, corrosive va-
pors, damaging gases) are present.
When installed in dusty and damp areas, suitable enclosures
must be provided.
Coordinated dimensions
The dimensions of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers only differ in
terms of the width of the device which depends on the number
of poles and the size.
Due to the nature of the design, the dimensions of devices with
a withdrawable version are determined by the dimensions of the
guide frames, which are slightly larger.
A special version of circuit breaker is utilized as a non-automatic
air circuit breaker. The non-automatic air circuit breakers are de-
signed without an solid-state release system and do not perform
any protection duties for the system.
One potential application is the use as a bus coupler in systems
with parallel feed-ins.
The versions and features can be selected according to those of
the circuit breakers.
The circuit breakers are available with various optional operating
mechanisms:
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical closing (stan-
dard design)
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical
closing
Motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electri-
cal closing
The operating mechanisms with electrical closing can be used
for synchronization tasks.
NSE0_00887 o
H S
100 80 66
460 / 590 460 / 590
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
320 / 410 320 / 410
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
H
100
C
150 (3p)
130 (4p)
704 / 914 704 / 914
291 / 291 385 / 385
434 / 434 460 / 460
S N
66 55 800
1000
1250
1600
630
800
1000
1250
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
4000
5000
6300
N
30
DC
The dimension for the depth of the circuit breaker is from the circuit breaker rear to the inner surface of the closed switchgear door.
Circuit breaker Breaking capacity Dimensions
Fixed-mounted,
With-
drawable
3- /4-pole
3- /4-pole
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
Height
Width
Depth
Height
S
i
z
e

I
I
I
S
i
z
e

I
S
i
z
e

I
I
at 500 V AC (kA) or cu
rated current (A)
n max
at 300 V DC (kA) cc
Siemens AG 2009
15/7
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Main circuit connections connection types
Main circuit connections
All circuit breakers are equipped with horizontal main circuit
connections on the rear for up to 5000 A as standard (horizontal
connection to busbars). Exception: Circuit breakers of size II
with max. rated current 4000 A.
Circuit breakers with a max. rated current of 6300 A and circuit
breakers size II with a max. rated current of 4000 A are equipped
with vertical main connections (for upright busbars).
The following options are available, with all combinations of top
and bottom connections possible:
Accessible from the front, single hole (for vertically installed
busbars)
Accessible from the front, double hole (holes according to
DIN 43673) (for vertically installed busbars)
At the rear, vertical (for vertically installed busbars)
Connecting flange (for direct connection to guide frame up to
4000 A).
Connection options for auxiliary circuit connections
Auxiliary circuit connections
The type of connection for the auxiliary switches depends on the
type of installation:
Withdrawable version: The internal auxiliary switches are con-
nected to the male connector on the switch side. When fully in-
serted, the connector makes a connection with the sliding
contact module (see "Design", graphic "Guide Frame") in the
guide frame. Various adapters can then be used to complete
the wiring (see the graphic "Connection Options for Auxiliary
Circuit Connections").
Fixed mounting: In this case the auxiliary supply connectors
are engaged directly onto the circuit breaker. The connectors
are equipped with coding pins that prevent them being mistak-
enly interchanged.
Operator panel
The operator panel is designed to protrude from a cut-out in the
door providing access to all control elements and displays with
the control cabinet door closed.
The operator panels for all circuit breakers (fixed-mounted/with-
drawable versions, 3-/4-pole) are identical. The operator panel
ensures degree of protection IP41.
Safety and reliability
To protect the circuit breakers and plant against unauthorized
switching as well as the maintenance and operator personnel, the
system contains many locking devices. Others can be retrofitted.
Other safety features include:
Infeed from above or below, as required
Locking of the guide frame with the circuit breaker removed,
as standard
Locking of the withdrawable circuit breaker against move-
ment, as standard
High degree of protection with cover IP55
Mechanical reclosing lockout after overload or short-circuit
release as standard
The circuit breaker is always equipped with the required num-
ber of auxiliary supply connectors
Standard version
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with the following
features as standard:
Mechanical ON and OFF pushbutton
Switch position indicator
Ready-to-close indicator
Memory status indicator
Auxiliary switch 2 NO + 2 NC
Rear horizontal main circuit connections for fixed-mounted and
withdrawable versions up to 5000 A, and rear vertical main cir-
cuit connections for 6300 A applications and size II with 4000 A
For 4-pole circuit breakers, the fourth pole (N) is installed on
the left and is 100 % loadable with the rated current
Contact erosion indicator for the main contacts
Auxiliary circuit plug-in system with SIGUT screw terminals
Delivery inclusive of all auxiliary circuit connectors to internal
features including coding device for the prevention of incor-
rect installation of auxiliary supply connectors for fixed-
mounted circuit breakers
Mechanical "tripped" indicator for solid-state release system
Mechanical reclosing lockout after tripping operation
Operator panel cannot be taken off with the circuit breaker in
the ON position
Additional features of the withdrawable version:
Main contacts:
Laminated receptacles in the guide frame, penetration blades
on the withdrawable circuit breaker
Position indicator in the operator panel of the withdrawable
circuit breaker
Captive manual crank handle for moving the withdrawable
circuit breaker
Guide frame with guide rails for easy moving of the withdraw-
able circuit breaker
The withdrawable circuit breaker can be locked to prevent it
being pushed out of position
The withdrawable circuit breaker cannot be moved when it is
in the ON position
Coding of the rated current between the guide frame and the
withdrawable circuit breaker
Standards
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers comply with:
IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-2
EN 60947-1, EN 60947-2
Climate-proof according to IEC 60068-2-30
Versions according to UL 489 also available, see Catalog LV 16.
For further specifications, see Appendix.
Horizontal
connection
Front connection with single
hole or double hole
Vertical
connection
Horizontal
connection
Front connection with single
hole or double hole
Vertical
connection
Flange
connection
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
6
7
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
6
8
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
6
9
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
9
a
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
6
7
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
0
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
1
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
2
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
3
b
Fixed-mounted circuit breakers
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames
Connection using
screw terminals
system (SIGUT)
(standard)
Screwless
connection method
(tension springs)
(optional)
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
5
b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
7
6
b
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/8
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Withdrawable short-circuit, grounding, and bridging
units
Portable positively-driven grounding and short-circuit devices
are used for the disconnected system sections to verify isolation
from the supply at the workplace.
Withdrawable grounding units allow simple and comfortable
grounding. They are simply inserted into the guide frames in
place of the corresponding withdrawable circuit breakers. This
ensures that these devices are always first connected with the
grounding electrode and then with the components to be
grounded.
The grounding terminals are fitted to the side of the switch enclo-
sure and establish the connection when inserted into the guide
frame.
All withdrawable terminals are short-circuited and grounded on
delivery.
Qualified electricians can easily convert it to a withdrawable
bridging unit by following the enclosed instructions.
In addition, the withdrawable unit can be adapted to various
rated currents of a size.
Withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit
The withdrawable short-circuit and grounding unit consists of a
breaker enclosure with penetration blades which are connected
with the short-circuiting link.
Depending on the version, the short-circuiting links are arranged
at the top or bottom. The grounding and short-circuit connec-
tions are established when the device is inserted.
It must be ensured that the side to be short-circuited and
grounded is not live. For this reason it is recommended that the
withdrawable unit is only wound in when the door is closed.
Withdrawable bridging unit
The withdrawable bridging unit consists of a breaker enclosure
in which all disconnection components and the operating mech-
anism have been replaced with simple connections between the
upper and lower contacts.
Auxiliary releases
Up to two auxiliary releases can be installed at the same time.
The following are available:
1 shunt release
or 1 undervoltage release
or 2 shunt releases
or 1 shunt release
+ 1 undervoltage release
Signal switch for auxiliary releases
One signaling contact is used for each auxiliary release to deter-
mine the positions of the auxiliary releases.
Shunt releases
When the operational voltage is connected to the shunt release,
the circuit breaker is opened immediately. The shunt release is
available in the versions 5 % ON period for overexcitation and
100 % ON period for permanent excitation. This means that it is
also possible to block the circuit breaker against being jogged
into closing.
An energy storage device for shunt releases allows the circuit
breaker to be opened even if the control voltage is no longer
available.
Undervoltage releases
The undervoltage release causes the circuit breaker to be
opened if the operational voltage falls below a certain value or is
not applied. The circuit breaker cannot be closed manually or by
means of an electrical ON command if the undervoltage release
is not connected to the operational voltage. The undervoltage re-
lease has no delay as standard. A delay can be set by the cus-
tomer in the range between t
d
< 80 ms and t
d
< 200 ms.
In addition, an undervoltage release with a delay in the range
from 0.2 to 3.2 s is available.
Closing solenoid
The closing solenoid is used to close the circuit breaker electri-
cally by means of a local electrical ON command or by a remote
unit.
Motorized operating mechanisms
The operating mechanism is used to load the storage spring au-
tomatically.
The operating mechanism is activated if the storage spring has
been unloaded and the control voltage is available.
It is switched off automatically after loading. This does not affect
manual operation of the storage spring.
Indicators, signals, and control elements
Motor shutdown switch
Control switch for switching off the motorized operating mecha-
nism (automatic loading).
Operating cycles counter
The motorized operating mechanism can be supplied with a 5-
digit operating cycles counter. The display is incremented by "1"
as soon as the storage spring is fully loaded.
Resetting the manual tripped signal
When the circuit breaker has tripped, this is indicated by the pro-
truding red mechanical tripped indicator on the ETU. When the
mechanical tripped indicator is activated, the tripping solenoid
and tripped signal are reset. If this display is to be reset remotely,
the reset button can be equipped with a reset solenoid.
This option allows the circuit breaker to be reset both manually
and electrically.
Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout
When the ETU is activated, reclosing of the circuit breaker is pre-
vented until the release is either electrically or manually reset. If
the "Automatic resetting of reclosing lockout" option is used, the
pre-tensioned circuit breaker is ready to close immediately after
tripping. Resetting the manual tripped indicator is not included
in this option.
Tripped signal switch
If the circuit breaker has tripped due to an overload, short-cir-
cuit, ground fault or extended protection function, the tripped
signal switch can indicate this. This signal switch is available as
an option. If the circuit breaker is used for communication, this
option is supplied as standard.
Ready-to-close indicator switch
The SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers are equipped with an opti-
cal ready-to-close indicator as standard. In addition, the ready-
to-close status can be transmitted by means of a signal switch
as an option. If the switch is used for communication, the signal
switch is supplied as standard.
Short-time current of the
grounding terminal
kA 15 (500 ms)
Rated operational voltage V 1000 (690 for size I)
Standards EN 61230
Siemens AG 2009
15/9
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Circuit breakers
Guide frames
NSE0_00965b
(1 )
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1 0)
(1 1 )
(1 5)
(1 3)
(1 2)
(1 4)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(22)
(1 6)
(1 7)
(1 8)
(20)
(1 9)
(21 )
(1) Arc chute
(2) Carrying handle
(3) Labeling plate
(4) Motor shutdown switch (option) or
"Electrical ON" (option)
(5) Name plate for circuit breaker
(6) Memory status indicator
(7) "Mechanical ON" button
(8) Rated current indication
(9) Positioning pictogram
(10) Operating cycles counter (option)
(11) Hand-operated lever
(12) Crank handle
(13) Withdrawable unit drive shaft
(14) Equipment plate
(15) Ground terminal
(16) Position indicator
(17) Table for ground-fault protection
(18) Safety lock for crank handle (option)
(19) Mechanical unlocking of crank handle
(option)
(20) Solid-state release
(21) Rated current module
(22) "Mechanical OFF" button or
"EMERGENCY-STOP" mushroom
pushbutton (option)
(23) Ready-to-close indicator
(24) Switch position indicator
(25) "Tripped" indicator (reset button)
(26) "Secure OFF" locking device (option)
(27) Operator panel
(28) Male connector for auxiliary circuit
connections
NSE0_00966b
(1 3)
(1 4)
(1 5)
(1 6)
(1 7)
(1 8)
(1 2)
(1 0)
(1 1 )
(1 )
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(1) Arc chute cover
(option)
(2) Blow-out openings
(3) Opening for crane hook
(4) Shutter (option)
(5) Locking device (shutter) (option)
(6) Type plate for guide frame
(7) Isolating contacts
(8) Ground terminal 14 mm
(9) Locking device for racking rail
(10) Locking device against movement when
control cabinet door is open (option)
(11) Door interlocking for guide frame (option)
(12) Racking rail
(13) Factory-set rated current coding
(14) Sliding contact for breaker grounding
(option)
(15) Equipment-dependent coding (option)
(16) Shutter actuator (optional)
(17) Position indicator switch (optional)
(18) Sliding contact module for auxiliary
conductors (number depends on
equipment)
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/10
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Locking devices
Locking device in OFF position
This function prevents closing of the circuit breaker and com-
plies to the specifications for main switches to EN 60204
(VDE 0113) - disconnector unit. This lockout only affects this cir-
cuit breaker.
If the circuit breaker is replaced, closing is no longer prevented
unless the new circuit breaker is also protected against unautho-
rized closing.
To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be
opened. The locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker
is closed. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
The safety key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.
Locking device for "Electrical ON"
(see graphic "Circuit breakers")
This prevents unauthorized electrical closing from the operator
panel. Mechanical closing and remote closing remain possible.
The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for "Mechanical ON"
(see graphic "Circuit breakers")
This prevents unauthorized mechanical closing. The mechanical
ON button can only be activated if the key is inserted (key oper-
ation). Closing with the "Electrical ON" button and remote closing
remain possible. The lock is only activated when the key is
removed.
"Secure OFF" circuit breaker-independent locking device
against unauthorized closing
This special switch-independent function for withdrawable cir-
cuit breakers prevents closing and fulfills the specifications for
main switches to EN 60204 (VDE 0113) disconnector unit. Un-
authorized closing remains impossible even after the circuit
breaker has been exchanged.
To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be opened. The
locking device is disabled when the circuit breaker is closed.
The lock is only activated when the key is removed. The safety
key can be removed only in the "OFF" position.
Locking device for crank handle
Prevents removal of the crank. The circuit breaker is protected
against movement. The lock is only activated when the key is
removed.
Locking device for "Mechanical OFF"
Prevents unauthorized mechanical opening from the operator
panel. The "Mechanical OFF pushbutton" can only be activated
if the key is inserted (key operation). Remote opening remains
possible. The lock is only activated when the key is removed.
Locking device for hand-operated lever
The hand-operated lever can be locked with a padlock. The stor-
age spring cannot be loaded manually.
Locking device against resetting the "tripped" indicator
A lockable cover prevents manual resetting of the "tripped" indi-
cator after overcurrent tripping. This locking device is supplied
together with the transparent cover for solid-state releases.
Sealing devices
Sealing cap for "Electrical ON" button
The "Electrical ON button" is equipped with a sealing cap as
standard.
Sealing cap for "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" button
The locking set contains covering caps which can be sealed.
Sealing device for solid-state releases
The transparent cover can be sealed. The parameter setting
sections are covered to prevent unauthorized access. Openings
allow access to the query and test button.
Locking mechanisms
Locking mechanism against movement for withdrawable circuit
breakers when the control cabinet door is open
The crank handle is blocked when the control cabinet door is
open and cannot be removed. The withdrawable circuit breaker
cannot be moved. The lock only affects the inserted crank
handle.
Locking of the control cabinet door
The control cabinet door cannot be opened if
The fixed-mounted circuit breaker is closed (the blocking
signal is transmitted via the Bowden wire) or
The withdrawable circuit breaker is in the connected position.
Blocking mechanism using "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons
The "Mechanical ON" and "OFF" buttons are covered with a cap
which only allows actuation with a tool. These covering caps are
part of the locking set.
Optional equipment for guide frames
Shutters
The sealing strips of the shutter seal the laminated contacts of
the guide frame when the withdrawable circuit breaker is re-
moved and therefore implement touch protection.
The sealing strips can be manually opened using the strip
levers.
The position of the sealing strips can be locked in various posi-
tions using padlocks for securing against tampering.
Siemens AG 2009
15/11
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide
frame
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames are equipped
with a rated current coding unit as standard.
This ensures that only circuit breakers whose penetration blades
are suited to the laminated contacts of the guide frame can be
inserted into a guide frame (see diagram below).
Rated current coding unit between circuit breaker and guide frame
Equipment-dependent coding
Withdrawable circuit breakers and guide frames can be retrofit-
ted with an equipment-dependent coding unit.
This allows different designs of circuit breakers and guide
frames to be uniquely assigned. If the circuit breaker and guide
frame have been assigned different codes, the circuit breaker
cannot be inserted.
36 different coding options can be selected.
Position indicator switch for guide frames
The guide frame can be equipped with position indicator
switches. These can be used to determine the position of the cir-
cuit breaker in the guide frame.
Two versions are available:
Option 1
Connected position 1 CO contact,
disconnected position 1 CO contact.
Option 2
Connected position 3 CO contacts,
disconnected position 1 CO contact.
Positions of the withdrawable circuit breaker in the guide frame
Phase barriers
The plant engineering company can manufacture phase barriers
made of insulating material for the arcing fault barriers. The rear
panel of the fixed-mounted circuit breakers or guide frames are
equipped with guide grooves.
Arc chute cover
The arc chute cover is available as optional equipment for the
guide frame. It protects switchgear components which are lo-
cated directly above the circuit breaker.
Door sealing frame and cover
SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers have degree of protection IP20
as standard. However, if the switchgear is to be equipped with a
higher degree of protection, a door sealing frame with IP41 and
a cover with IP55 are available.
(1 )
(3)
(2)
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
0
3
1
a
(4)
(5)
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
0
3
2
a
(1) Guide frame, interior of l/h side; interior of r/h side similar
(2) Coding pin on racking rail in guide frame
(3) Racking rail
(4) Withdrawable circuit breaker, r/h side; l/h side similar
(5) Coding pin on guide frame
Display Position indicator Main circuit Auxiliary circuit Control cabinet
door
Shutters
Maintenance position Disconnected Disconnected Open Closed
Disconnected position Disconnected Disconnected Closed Closed
Test position Disconnected Connected Closed Closed
Connected position Connected Connected Closed Open
(1) Auxiliary circuit (2) Main circuit (3) Control cabinet door (4) Shutter
NSE0_01 033a
(1 )
(2)
(4)
CONNECT
TEST
DISCON
NSE01037
NSE0_01 034a
(3)
CONNECT
TEST
DISCON
NSE01038
NSE0_01 035a
CONNECT
TEST
DISCON
NSE01039
NSE0 01 036a
CONNECT
TEST
DISCON
NSE01040
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/12
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Function
ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B
Functions of the solid-state releases
Basic protection functions
Overload protection L
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection I
Neutral conductor protection N -- --
Ground-fault protection G -- --
Additional functions
N-conductor protection can be switched on/off -- --
N-conductor protection adjustable -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Non-delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --
Load monitoring -- -- --
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I
2
t -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit protection adjustable -- --
Overload protection switchable to I
4
t -- -- --
Overload protection can be switched on/off -- -- --
Selectable parameter sets -- -- --
Parameterization and display
Parameterization through rotary coding switches (10 steps)
Parameterization through communication (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization through user interface of ETU (absolute values) -- -- --
Parameterization of the extended protection functions -- -- --
LCD alphanumerical -- -- --
Graphic LCD -- -- --
Communication
CubicleBUS -- -- --
Communication through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Communication through MODBUS -- -- --
Communication through Ethernet -- -- --
Standard -- Not available Optional
Detailed information about the functions of the solid-state releases is given in the following.
R
i
NSE0_00950c
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
8
8
0
b
R
sd
J
sd
NSE0_00951 b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
8
8
1
b
R
sd
J
sd
g
J
g
NSE0_00952b
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
8
8
2
b
Siemens AG 2009
15/13
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
ETU45B ETU76B

--
--
--
--
--

--
--

I
R
t
R
I
sd
t
sd
I
i
t
g
I
g
NSE0 00953a
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
8
8
3
b
=
1
2
Rating Plug
I
R
t
R
I
sd
t
sd
I
i
t
g
I
g
NSE0 00953a
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
8
8
6
c
ETU76B
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/14
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Solid-state releases (ETU)
The solid-state release is controlled by a microprocessor and
operates independently of an auxiliary voltage. It enables sys-
tems to be adapted to the different protection requirements of
distribution systems, motors, transformers and generators.
Communication capabilities
The international standard PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS can be
used to transmit data such as current values, switching states,
reasons for tripping etc. to central computers.
Data acquisition and energy management are possible in con-
junction with the Plus measurement function.
A new internal circuit breaker data bus allows switchboard panel
communication between the circuit breaker and secondary de-
vices in the circuit breaker section:
Actuation of analog displays
Facility to test the communication build-up with circuit
breakers
Display of tripping state and tripping reasons
Input module for reading in further switchgear panel signals
and for transmission of these signals to the PROFIBUS DP or
MODBUS
Various output modules for displaying measured values
This means that it is not only possible to monitor the device re-
motely, but also to transmit current values from the entire system
and perform switching operations remotely.
I
2
t and I
4
t characteristic curve for overload protection
The best protection for the whole switchgear is achieved by set-
ting the tripping characteristic curve to an optimum value. In or-
der to achieve optimal discrimination for upstream fuses or me-
dium voltage protection systems, the inclination of the
characteristic curve can be selected for the overload range.
The overload protection L (long time protection) for the solid-
state releases ETU45B and ETU76B allows the characteristic
curve to be switched between I
2
t and I
4
t.
The I
4
t characteristic improves discrimination for downstream
circuit breakers and fuses.
Solid-state releases ETU
Modularity has also been strictly emphasized during the devel-
opment of the solid-state releases. These are some of the
modules which can be easily retrofitted at any time:
Ground-fault protection module
Communication
Display
Rated current module (Rating Plug)
This allows quick adaptation to new local mains specifications.
In addition, innovative functions have been included in the ETUs.
Rated current module/Rating Plug
The rated current module is an exchangeable module which al-
lows the user to reduce the rated device current so as to adapt
it optimally to the plant; e. g. if a new plant section is taken into
operation. The rated current module must be selected to fit the
rated current of the plant.
Example of configuration for ETU45B
Selectable parameters
In the case of quick changes of power supply conditions,
e. g. for switchovers from transformer to generator operation or
if a section of the supply is disconnected when the shift
changes, SENTRON 3WL allows the relevant protection param-
eters to be quickly adapted to the new conditions.
The ETUs contain two independent tripping characteristic
curves (parameter sets). The switchover is completed within
200 ms and is performed with the help of an external signal.
Ground-fault
protection
module (retro-
fittable)
Tripped indicator/
Reset button
LCD alpha-
numeric
with 15
inclination
and rotatable
through 180
Slide switch
for switchable
overload
characteristic
curve
Rated current
module/
rating plug
Siemens AG 2009
15/15
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
ETU15B solid-state release
Application:
Simple building and
system protection without time-se-
lective coordination up to 4000 A.
Not to be used for size III.
Features:
Adjustable overload protection
with I
2
t characteristic curve
with preset delay time
t
R
= 10 seconds at 6 I
R
Instantaneous short-circuit pro-
tection adjustable in the range
2 ... 8 I
n
Overload display
Protection function is set by
means of the rotary coding
switch
For technical details see the table
"Functional overview of the
solid-state release system"
under "Technical specifications".
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
5
4
b
Option: safety lock
prevents pressing of
reset button after
overcurrent release
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Mechanical RESET
for reclosing lockout
and mechanical
tripped indicator
Rotary switch for setting
value, overload release
value, instantaneous
short-circuit release
Indicator: overload alarm
Indicator: overcurrent
release activated
Application:
Classical building, motor and sys-
tem protection with time-selective
coordination for up to 6300 A
Features:
Adjustable overload protection
with I
2
Delay time t
R
=
10 seconds at 6 I
R
Short-time delayed short-circuit
protection adjustable in the
range 1.25 ... 12 I
n
and
Instantaneous short-circuit
protection preset
to 20 I
n
, max. 50 kA
Can be adapted at any time to
the required plant currents
through retrofittable rated cur-
rent module, thus ensuring over-
load protection in the range from
100 A to 6300 A
Overload display
Indicates the reason for tripping
by means of an LED
Test facility for the release
Protection functions are
set by means of the
rotary coding switch
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
5
5
b
Rating Plug
ETU25B
Option: safety lock
reset button after
overcurrent release
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Mechanical RESET
and mechanical
tripped indicator
release activated
Query pushbutton
Test pushbutton Clear pushbutton
Indicator: cause of release
Rotary switch for delay,
Rated current module
Short-circuit protection
fixed setting
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/16
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Application:
Classical building, motor and sys-
tem protection with time-selective
coordination for up to 6300 A
Features:
The same as ETU25B but also
Reversible neutral conductor
protection
Permanently integrated ground-
fault protection. Calculation of
the ground-fault current through
vectorial summation current
formation
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
9
5
6
c
Rating Plug
N
OFF
OFF ON
ETU27B
earth-fault protection
N-conductor protection
on/off
value, earth-fault protection
Option: safety lock
reset button after
overcurrent release
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Clear pushbutton
Mechanical RESET
and mechanical
tripped indicator
release activated
Query pushbutton
Test pushbutton
fixed setting
Application:
Low-cost all-round system for intelligent
buildings and all types of industrial applica-
tions "CubicleBUS integrated"
Features:
Adjustable time-lag class
for overload protection
Selectable characteristic for overload and
short-delayed short-circuit range (current
discrimination) for more accurate discrimi-
nation adaptation to upstream fuses and
protective devices
Thermal image as restart protection for
tripped motor outgoing feeders
Reversible and adjustable neutral conduc-
tor protection
Modular ground-fault protection module
with alarm and tripping functions which can
be adjusted separately
Communication interface,
measurement function Plus, optional con-
nection of external modules or for
retrofitting
Storage of events and causes for tripping
for detailed fault analysis
Extended protection function possible with
measurement function
Optional high-contrast display with viewing
angle adjustment option
The protection functions can be set by
means of a rotary coding switch or slide
switch
"Technical specifications".
=
1
2
g
NSE0_00957b
Rating Plug
OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1
SI
ETU45B
t / t
4 2
t / t
2
g g
Option: safety lock
reset button after
overcurrent release
Mechanical RESET
and mechanical
tripped indicator
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release
Sealing ring
Test socket
Overload alarm
Overcurrent release
activated
Clear pushbutton
Selector for
N-conductor protection on/off
Scroll up
COMMUNICATION
EXPANDED
Indicators:
value, short-circuit
protection
value, earth-fault
protection
value, earth-fault alarm
Test pushbutton
Query pushbutton
Option: alphanumeric display
Scroll down
Thermal memory on/off
Setting value
N-conductor overload
Indicator: earth-fault tripped
Indicator: earth-fault alarm
Option: earth-fault module
overload release
Transfer of overload
characteristic
Siemens AG 2009
15/17
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Ground-fault protection Ground-fault releases "G" sense fault currents that flow to ground
and that can cause fire in the plant. Multiple circuit breakers con-
nected in series can have their delay times adjusted so as to pro-
vide graduated discrimination.
When setting the parameters for the solid-state release it is pos-
sible to choose between "alarm" and "trip" in the event that the
set current value is exceeded. The reason for tripping is indi-
cated by means of an LED when the query button is activated.
The ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state release versions can be
retrofitted with a ground-fault protection module. This ground
fault protection function is integrated in ETU27B solid-state re-
leases.
Application:
The multi-talent with graphical
display for system analysis
"CubicleBUS integrated"
Features:
including
Two protection parameter sets
which can be stored separately
in the release (switchover is per-
formed by means of external sig-
nal)
With overload protection which
can be deactivated for operation
in modern drive technology
Adjustable delay of
delayed short-circuit protection
up to 4000 ms
Neutral conductor protection ad-
justable up to I
N
= 200 % I
n
Setting of protection functions by
means of Breaker Data Adapter
(BDA) or via communications in-
terface
Graphical display of all
parameters and events/
curve trends
Graphics display with high con-
trast, backlit display, and sleep
mode
Rating Plug
NSE0_00960b
ETU76B
Option: safety lock
reset button after
overcurrent release
Mechanical RESET
and mechanical
tripped indicator
Overload alarm
Overcurrent release
activated
COMMUNICATION
EXPANDED
Indicators:
Query pushbutton
Test pushbutton
Fields for noting
setting values
Indicator: fault in
overcurrent release
Test socket
Clear pushbutton
Ground-fault tripped
Indicators:
Fields for noting
setting values
Ground-fault alarm
Control keys for setting
he release parameters
Graphical display
Option: earth-fault module
GFM AT 45B ground-fault module
GFM AT 55B-76B ground-fault module
1
ALARM ALARM
.5
.4
.3
.2
.1
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
J
g
(s) 1
2
J
g
NSE0_00962a
GFM AT 45B
TRIP
G A
B
C
D
E
OFF
TRIP g
Selector for
ground-fault
detection
Rotary switch
for setting value
ground-fault alarm
Ground-fault
alarm
Rotary switch
for setting
value, ground-
fault protection delay
J
g
/1 J
g
Rotary switch
for setting
value,
ground-fault
protection
Ground-fault
tripped
Indicators:
2
ALARM ALARM
NSE0_00964a
GFM AT 55B-76B
TRIP TRIP
g
A
A
ms
1
2
J
1
g 1
g 1 g J
=
= =
Field for
noting
transfer
ground-fault
detection
Fields for
noting setting
values
Ground-fault
alarm
Fields for
noting setting
values
Ground-fault
tripped
Indicators:
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/18
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Measurement method
Vectorial summation current formation (measurement method 1)
The three phase currents and the N conductor current are mea-
sured directly.
The solid-state release determines the ground-fault current by
means of vectorial summation current formation for the three
phase currents and the N conductor current.
Direct measurement of the ground-fault current
(measurement method 2)
A standard current transformer with the following data is used for
measurement of the ground-fault current: 1200 A/1 A, Class 1
(the internal load of SENTRON 3WL is 0.11 :). The current trans-
former can be installed directly in the grounded neutral point of
a transformer.
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the N conductor
3-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral
point of the transformer
4-pole circuit breakers, current transformers in the grounded neutral
point of the transformer
Setting
How the module is set depends on the measurement method
used (see above):
Measurement method 1: in position .
Measurement method 2: in position .
This setting can be implemented for the solid-state release ver-
sion ETU76B with Menu/Comm.
Ground-fault protection with I
2
With the exception of the ETU27B solid-state release, all
versions of the ground-fault modules are supplied with an I
2
t
characteristic curve which can be activated.
Selection criteria for SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Basic criteria for selecting circuit breakers are:
Max. short-circuit current at place of installation of circuit
breaker I s
k max
.
This value determines the short-circuit breaking capacity
or short-circuit current carrying capacity of the circuit breaker.
It is compared with the value I
cu
, I
cs
, I
cw
of the circuit breaker
and essentially determines the size of the circuit breaker.
See illustration "Overview of SENTRON 3WL Circuit
Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit Breakers".
Rated current I
n
which is to flow through the branch circuit.
This value must not be larger than the maximum rated current
for the circuit breaker.
The rated current for the SENTRON 3WL is set with the rated
current module. See "Design", illustration "Overview of
SENTRON 3WL Circuit Breakers/Non-Automatic Air Circuit
Breakers".
Ambient temperature
for the circuit breaker.
This is usually the control cabinet internal temperature.
Design of the circuit breaker
Minimum short-circuit current
which flows through the switching device. The release must
still detect this value as a short-circuit and must respond by
tripping.
Protection functions of the circuit breaker.
These are determined by the selection of the
corresponding solid-state release, see the table
"Functions of the solid-state releases" under "Functions".
NSE 00946
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
T5
SENTRON WL
NSE 00947
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
T6
SENTRON WL
T6: 1200 A/1 A
NSE 00948
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
T6
SENTRON WL
T6: 1200 A/1 A
Siemens AG 2009
15/19
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
SENTRON 3WL for DC applications
This version of the 3WL non-automatic air circuit breaker is suit-
able for direct current applications. The external protective de-
vice DIGmat S100 provides adjustable overload and short-
circuit protection for the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic air circuit
breaker.
This is based on the measuring chain of a shunt resistor and the
DIGmat S100 tripping unit. Shunt resistors are available for
1000 A, 2000 A and 4000 A (special ranges on request). They
are in accordance with DIN 43703 and have a class accuracy
of 0.5.
A measuring-circuit voltage of 60 mV DC is picked off for rated
current I
n
.
The measuring-circuit voltage is a linear image of the primary
current.
The DIGmat S100 tripping unit monitors the image of the primary
current thus supplied and compares it with the tripping charac-
teristic curve set on the device. The parameter settings on the
DIGmat S100 apply also for DC feedbacks.
Reversing duty is possible therefore.
The tripping characteristic curve is determined and described
by the following variables:
Overload protection:
Setting range I
R
= 0.4 ... 1.0 I
n
The curve has a I
2
t characteristic.
The tripping time t
R
is selectable between 2 and 10 s, with t
R

defined for 6 I
R
.
DIGmat S100
Short-circuit protection:
Setting range I
i
= 1.25 I
R
up to max. 4 I
n

If the set value is exceeded, tripping occurs in less than
50 ms.
I
n
= Rated current of the circuit breaker
I
R
= Set current value of the adjustable overload release
t
R
= Assigned tripping time of the overload trip
I
i
= Instantaneous tripping current of the adjustable short-
circuit releases
The components are available only from the company
mat Maschinen- und Anlagentechnik
(for address see "Appendix" => "External Partners").
Configuration
Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
The module for mutual mechanical interlocking can be used for
one or two SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers and can be adapted
easily to the corresponding versions. The fixed-mounted and
withdrawable circuit breaker versions are fully compatible and
can therefore be used in a mixed configuration in an installation.
This also applies to 3WN6 circuit breakers.
The circuit breakers can be mounted alongside each other or
one above the other, whereby the distance of the circuit breakers
is determined solely by the length of the Bowden wire (lengths:
2 m/3 m/4.5 m). Interlock signals are looped through using the
Bowden wires. Interlocking is only effective in the connected po-
sition in the case of withdrawable circuit breakers. The mechan-
ical endurance of the Bowden cables is 10 000 operating cycles.
Minimum requirements must be fulfilled in the switchgear for the
interlocking to function:
Bowden wires must be installed as far as possible in a straight
line with minimum bending.
The bending radii of the Bowden wire must be greater than
500 mm.
The sum of all bending angles along the Bowden wire must not
exceed 640.
In a vertical arrangement of circuit breakers to be interlocked,
the interlocking mechanisms must be in line.
Circuit breakers to be interlocked must be arranged so that
Bowden cables can be optimally installed in compliance with
the conditions mentioned in the above points.
The installed Bowden wire must be fixed (with cable ties or the
like) before the interlock is adjusted.
Select the width of switchgear cubicle to allow enough free-
dom of movement for adjusting the interlock!
Openings and cut-outs in system elements must be designed
so that Bowden wires are not changed in direction or ob-
structed when they are passed through.
Mutual mechanical interlocking of circuit breakers examples
Mutual interlocking of two
circuit breakers
Interlocking between three
circuit breakers
Mutual interlocking of three
circuit breakers
Interlocking of three circuit
breakers, two of them mutual
G
NSE01041
S
1
S
2
NSE01042
S
1
S
3
S
2
NSE01043
S
1
S
2
S
3
G
NSE01044
S
1
S
2
S
3
G
S
1
S
3
S
2
NSE01045
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/20
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Communication-capable circuit breakers
Communication with PROFIBUS DP
Communication with MODBUS
The requirements for power distribution in terms of communica-
tion capability, data transparency, flexibility and integration are
constantly increasing. An integrated and modular communica-
tion architecture was designed for the SENTRON 3WL to ensure
that it can satisfy these requirements.
The core component of this architecture is the CubicleBUS,
which links together all of the intelligent components within the
SENTRON 3WL and enables the easy and safe connection of
other additional external components to the circuit breaker. The
CubicleBUS is already incorporated and pre-connected in all
complete circuit breakers with ETU45B and ETU76B releases.
The high level of modularity of the system allows communication
functions to be retrofitted at any time (e. g. the measurement
function). Similarly, the upgrade of a non-communication-capa-
ble SENTRON 3WL (e .g. changeover from ETU25B to ETU45B
with CubicleBUS) can be carried out easily on site in the plant.
All modules connected to the CubicleBUS can directly access
the existing source data of the circuit breaker, which guarantees
the quickest possible access to information and response to
events.
Furthermore, additional external modules (including digital in-
puts/outputs, analog outputs) can be connected to the
CubicleBUS to provide cost-effective solutions for the automa-
tion of further devices in the switchgear.
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
2
0
a
Ethernet/
Intranet/
Internet
PLC e.g. SIMATIC S7
data acquisition and
processing
PC with Switch ES Power
SENTRON 3WL/3VL parameterization
and visualization tool through
PROFIBUS DP
Output device
e.g. notebook
with browser
BDA
BDA Plus
Measurement-
function Plus
COM15
BSS
ETU
Z
o
n
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

I
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
R
e
l
a
y
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
R
e
l
a
y
,

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
b
l
e
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

i
n
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
9
4
Ethernet/
Intranet/
Internet
MODBUS Master
PLC or monitoring software
Configuration and
display software
Output device
e.g. notebook
with browser
BDA
BDAPlus
Measurement
function Plus
COM16
BSS
ETU
MODBUS
Z
o
n
e

S
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

I
n
t
e
r
l
o
c
k
i
n
g

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
R
e
l
a
y
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
R
e
l
a
y
,

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
b
l
e
A
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

i
n
p
u
t

m
o
d
u
l
e
Siemens AG 2009
15/21
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
SENTRON 3WL communication-capable circuit breakers
Function Solid-state
release version
Breaker
Status
Sensor
PROFI-
BUS
com-
munica-
tion
port
Mea-
sure-
ment
func-
tion
Plus
Analog
output
mod-
ules
Digital
output
mod-
ules
Digital
input
mod-
ules
ZSI
mod-
ules
Breaker
Data
Adapter
Breaker
Data
Adapter
Plus
ETU45B ETU76B
Functions of the communication-capable SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
Indication of measured values in release (current
only)

Indication of measured values in release
(U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.)

Indication of measured values (current only),
parameter, diagnostic values etc. on display
--
Indication of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.),
parameters, diagnostic values etc. in release
--
Output of measured values (current only)
to rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door

Output of measured values (U, I, P, S, Q, p.f., etc.) to
rotary coil instruments in control cabinet door

Output of digital signals
(e. g. reason for tripping, alarm signals, status)
through contacts

Automatic changeover between
parameter sets A and B
--
Read in digital signals and forward to
PROFIBUS/MODBUS

Transmission of switch information
on HTML basis locally to a PC

Transmission of switch information
on HTML basis through Ethernet

Short-time grading control for
S tripping and G protection

Local display of harmonic analysis and waveform
memory
--
Local storage of harmonic analysis and waveform
memory and transmission through PROFIBUS

Read out protection parameters through PROFIBUS
Read out and adjust protection parameters through
PROFIBUS
--
Required
Function can optionally be taken over by more than one release.
Function can optionally be taken over by one of these modules.
Not necessary for this function, optionally combinable
-- Function not available
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/22
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Data that can be transmitted over the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS or the Breaker Data Adapter
1)
Data only available in conjunction with the COM15 module (BUS connec-
tion not required).
2)
Only possible with ETU76B.
Available
-- Not available
All SENTRON 3WLs with ETU45B, ETU76B (CubicleBUS integrated)
Transmittable circuit breaker data
BSS BDA BSS COM15/COM16
Order code (Order No. of circuit breaker + "Z")
Order No.
F01
+"BDA/BDAPLUS"
Order No.
F02/F12
Potential applications
Transmission of circuit breaker data to PROFIBUS DP or MODBUS and integration into
higher-level visualization systems are possible
e. g. in PCS7, Power Management Systems, WinCC (incl. add-ons like the text message radio server)
--
Transmission of circuit breaker data and software (i. e. HTML pages with data) to a local output
device, or remotely through Ethernet/Intranet/Internet (without the possibility of integration into
higher-level visualization systems)
e. g. for monitoring, diagnostics, maintenance and parameterization of individual circuit breakers
--
Utilization of the functionality of all CubicleBUS modules
e. g. configuration of the configurable digital output module, status check of the digital input modules,
diagnostics

Transmittable circuit breaker data without integrated measurement function
Device identification
Communication address, Order No., circuit breaker in delivery status, circuit breaker parameters
(size, number of poles, rated current module etc.), identification numbers, release type,
Free text for plant code and comments
--
1)
Operating statuses
On/off status message, storage spring, tripped, readiness
Switching position (connected, test and disconnected position, removed) for withdrawable circuit breakers,
PROFIBUS/MODBUS write protection on/off, free user input
--
1)
--
1)
Control commands
Switch circuit breaker on/off, switch free user output on/off
Reset tripped signal
Delete event and history memory
Reset the min./max. measured values, reset the maintenance information
--
1)
--
1)
History
Read out the event protocol, read out the release protocol --
1)
Maintenance information
Number of tripping operations L, S/I and in total, contact wear
Number of operating cycles under load and in total, number of operating hours
--
1)

Event signals
Tripped signal with details of the tripping current
Alarm signals (e. g. overload) with incoming/outgoing information
All of the named event signals with time stamp
--
1)
--
1)
Parameterization of the protection functions

Reading out of the protection function parameters
Settings for the protection function parameters can be changed by means of communication
Parameter set switchover possible (set A to set B and back)

2)

2)

2)

2)
Measured values
Phase currents, each with min./max. value
Temperature in the circuit breaker with min./max. value
Temperature in the control cabinet with min./max. value
All of the named measured values with time stamp
--
1)
--
1)
--
1)
Plus
Order code F01+ ... or F02+ ... F05
Additional transmittable circuit breaker data with integrated measurement function
Additional event signals
Threshold value alarms (e. g. over/underfrequency, over/undervoltage)
Parameterization of the extended protection functions and setpoints (threshold values)
Reading out the parameters of the extended protection functions
Settings for the extended protection function parameters can be changed
Reading out and adjusting threshold values
Additional measured values

Voltages, power, energy, power factor, frequency, each with min./max. value
Harmonic analysis
Recording of currents and voltages for configurable events in the curve form memory
Siemens AG 2009
15/23
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
CubicleBUS modules
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch
6 items of binary information concerning the state of the circuit
breaker (reasons for tripping and warnings) can be output via
this module to external signaling devices (e. g. LED, horn) or be
used for the selective shut-down of other system components
(e. g. frequency converters).
Digital output modules are available in versions with and without
a rotary coding switch. On modules with a rotary coding switch
it is possible to choose between two signaling blocks each with
6 defined assignments and to set an additional response delay.
All the digital output modules are available as a version with re-
lay outputs (CO contacts, up to 12 A). Up to two modules of this
type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.
Digital output module with rotary coding switch
Digital output modules, configurable
The configurable output module is available for higher-perfor-
mance solutions. With this module, random events on the
CubicleBUS can be switched directly to one of six available out-
puts or three of these outputs can be assigned with up to six
events. In other words, up to six events can be placed on one
physical output with OR operation. Either BDA/BDA Plus or
Switch ES Power is used for configuring.
A relay variant is also available here the same as for the output
modules with rotary coding switch. Only one module of this type
is possible per SENTRON 3WL.
Digital output module, configurable
Analog output modules
The analog output module can be used to output the following
measured values to analog indicators in the control cabinet
door:
I
L1
, I
L2
, I
L3
, I
N
or
U
L12
, U
L23
, U
L31
, U
L1N
or
P
L1
, P
L2
, P
L3
, S
tot
or
p.f.
1
, p.f.
2
, p.f.
3
, 'I % or
f
avg
, U
LLavg
, P
tot
, p.f.
avg
Four 4-20-mA/0-10-V interfaces are available for this. The mea-
sured values to be output are selected with a rotary coding
switch. By using the analog output module it is possible to do
without additional converters and their conventional installa-
tion/wiring in the main current path. Up to two modules of this
type can be connected to one SENTRON 3WL.
Digital input modules
With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals
(24 V DC) in the circuit breaker environment can be connected
to the system. It is thus possible for example to send messages
concerning the state of a switch disconnector or a control cabi-
net door to the PROFIBUS DP/MODBUS.
With the digital input module on the CubicleBUS it is also possi-
ble for the two different protection parameter sets held in the
ETU76B solid-state releases to be switched over automatically in
a few milliseconds. It is thus possible, for example, to automati-
cally change the parameters of a coupling switch should the
transformer infeed fail.
One module each of this type can be used for holding the six
items of digital information and for automatically switching over
the parameters.
ZSI modules (short-time grading control)
The use of ZSI modules is recommended when Siemens circuit
breakers are arranged in several staggered levels but full grad-
ing with the smallest possible delay is to be assured nevertheless.
The circuit breakers are interconnected by these modules. In
case of a short-circuit, each affected circuit breaker asks the cir-
cuit breakers directly downstream whether the short-circuit has
also occurred in the next, lower level. The short-circuit is exactly
localized as the result, and only the next upstream circuit
breaker in the energy flow direction is switched off.
ZSI module (short-time grading control)
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/24
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Technical specifications
1)
Size II with I
n max
d 2500 A.
2)
Size II with I
n max
= 3200 A and I
n max
= 4000 A.
3)
cw
greater than the I
cu
or I
cs
value at 690 V.
4)
e
= 1150 V.
Size I II III
Switching capacity class N

S

N

S

H

H

C
3-pole
C
4-pole
e

up to 415 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 500 V AC
I
cu
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cs
kA 55 66 66 80 100 100 150 130
I
cm
kA 121 145 145 176 220 220 330 286
e

up to 690 V AC
I
cu
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cs
kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 150 130
I
cm
kA 88 105 105 165 187 187 330 286
e

up to 1000 V/1150 V AC
I
cu
kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cs
kA -- -- -- -- 45 50 70
4)
70
4)
I
cm
kA -- -- -- -- 95 105 154
4)
154
4)
cw

3)
0.5 s kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
1 s kA 42 50 55 66 80 100 100 100
2 s kA 29.5 35 39 46 65
1)
/70
2)
80 80 80
3 s kA 24 29 32 37 50
1)
/65
2)
65 65 65
cc

Up to 500 V AC kA 50 66 66 80 100 100 100 100
Up to 690 V AC kA 42 50 50 75 85 85 100 100
N S N S H H C C
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
(I
cu
= I
cs
at 500 V)
Circuit breakers with DC switching capacity
These circuit breakers are indicated in the Technical
specifications by orange-colored backgrounds.
N
S
H
C
DC
Siemens AG 2009
15/25
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
1)
Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with
ETU15B = 85 ms.
2)
Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes
(short-time excited) 50 ms.
3)
Maintenance means: replace main contact elements and arc chutes (see
Operating Manual).
4)
Use of releases from 20 C.
5)
ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 C.
Size I II
Type ... 3WL11 10 3WL11 12 3WL11 16 3WL12 08 3WL12 10 3WL12 12 3WL12 16 3WL12 20
Rated current I
n
at 40 C, at 50/60 Hz
Main conductor
N conductor (only on 4-pole versions)
A
A
... 1000
... 1000
1250
1250
1600
1600
800
800
1000
1000
1250
1250
1600
1600
2000
2000
e
at 50/60 Hz
(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")
V AC ... 690 ... 690 ... 690 ...
690/1000
...
690/1000
...
690/1000
...
690/1000
...
690/1000
Rated insulation voltage U
i
V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage U
imp
Main current paths
Auxiliary circuits
Control circuits
kV
kV
kV
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Utilization categories B
Permissible ambient temperature
During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 C)
4)
During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be
observed)
C
C
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
Permissible load
At rear horizontal main circuit
connections
5)
painted)
5)
A
A
A
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1210
1600
1600
1490
800
800
800
1000
1000
1000
1250
1250
1250
1600
1600
1600
2000
2000
2000
Rated rotor operational voltage U
er
V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power loss at I
n
With 3-phase symmetrical load
Withdrawable circuit breakers
W
W
100
195
105
205
150
350
40
85
45
95
80
165
85
175
180
320
Operating times
Make-time
Opening time
Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)
2)
Electrical opening time (through shunt release)
Electrical opening time (instant. undervoltage release)
Opening time due to ETU, instant. short-circuit release
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
35
38
80
73
73
50
1)
35
38
80
73
73
50
1)
35
38
80
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
Endurance
Mechanical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles
Mechanical (with maintenance)
3)
Oper. cycles
Electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles
1000 V version, electrical (without maintenance) Oper. cycles
Electrical (with maintenance)
3)
Oper. cycles
10000
20000
10000
--
--
20000
10000
20000
10000
--
--
20000
10000
20000
10000
--
--
20000
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
Switching frequency
690 V version
1000 V version
1150 V version
1/h
1/h
1/h
60
--
--
60
--
--
60
--
--
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state
release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only
with autom. mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
and/
or
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Main conductor
minimum
cross-sections
Copper bars,
bare
Copper bars,
painted black
Units
mm
2
Units
mm
2
1
60 10
1
60 10
2
40 10
2
40 10
2
50 10
2
50 10
1
50 10
1
50 10
1
60 10
1
60 10
2
40 10
2
40 10
2
50 10
2
50 10
3
50 10
3
50 10
Auxiliary conductors (Cu)
Max. number of
auxiliary conductors
cross-section (solid/stranded)
Standard connection =
strain-relief clamp
Without end sleeve
With end sleeve acc. to
DIN 46228 Part 2
With twin end sleeve
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16); 1 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
1 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 1 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Optional connection =
tension spring
Without end sleeve
With end sleeve acc. to
DIN 46228 Part 2
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Position indicator switches Tension spring terminals 1 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 1 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
Weights 3-pole
4-pole
breakers
breakers
Guide frames
breakers
breakers
Guide frames
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
43
45
25
50
54
30
43
45
25
50
54
30
43
45
25
50
54
30
56
60
31
67
72
37
56
60
31
67
72
37
56
60
31
67
72
37
56
60
31
67
72
37
56
60
31
67
72
37
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSE0_00927a
h
=
m
m
m
a
x
.
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/26
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
1)
Opening time on instantaneous short-circuit release with
ETU15B = 85 ms.
2)
Make-time through closing solenoid for synchronization purposes
3)
Operating Manual).
4)
Use of releases from 20 C.
5)
ETU76B with graphics display can be used up to max. 55 C.
6)
4000 A, size II in fixed-mounted version, 3-pole.
7)
Size III: data for very high switching capacity.
8)
Minimum main conductor cross-sections for 4-pole withdrawable circuit
breakers: 4 x 120 x 10 mm.
Size II III
Type 3WL12 25 3WL12 32 3WL12 40 3WL13 40 3WL13 50 3WL13 63
Rated current I
n
at 40 C, at 50/60 Hz
Main conductor
N conductor (only on 4-pole versions)
A
A
2500
2500
3200
3200
4000
4000
4000
4000
5000
5000
6300
6300
e
at 50/60 Hz
(for 1000 V version see Catalog LV 1, "Options")
V AC ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000 ... 690/1000
i
V AC 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
imp
Main current paths
Auxiliary circuits
Control circuits
kV
kV
kV
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Utilization categories B (except switching capacity class DC)
During operation (in operation with LCD max. 55 C)
4)
During storage (special conditions for LCDs must be observed)
C
C
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
25/+70
40/+70
Permissible load
6)
5)
Up to 70 C (Cu black painted)
5)
A
A
A
2500
2500
2280
3200
3020
2870
3950
3810
3600
4000
4000
4000
5000
5000
5000
5920
5810
5500
Rated rotor operational voltage U
er
V 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power loss at I
n
With 3-phase symmetrical load
W
W
270
520
410
710
750
925
520
810
630
1050
900
1600
Operating times
Make-time
Opening time
Electrical make-time (through closing solenoid)
2)
Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)
Opening time due to ETU, instantaneous short-circuit release
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
1)
35
34
100
73
73
50
35
34
100
73
73
50
35
34
100
73
73
50
Endurance
3)
Oper. cycles
1150 V version, electrical
7)
(without maintenance) Oper. cycles
3)
Oper. cycles
10000
15000
7500
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
4000
1000
500
15000
10000
15000
4000
1000
500
15000
5000
10000
2000
1000
1000
10000
5000
10000
2000
1000
1000
10000
5000
10000
2000
1000
1000
10000
Switching frequency
690 V version
1000 V version
1150 V version
7)
1/h
1/h
1/h
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
60
20
20
Minimum interval between tripping operation by solid-state
release and next making operation of the circuit breaker (only
with automatical mechanical resetting of the lockout device)
ms 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing frame, IP55 with cover
Main conductor
minimum
cross-sections
Copper bars,
bare
Copper bars,
painted black
Units
mm
2
Units
mm
2
2
100 10
2
100 10
3
100 10
3
100 10
4
120 10
4
100 10
8)
4 x
100 x 10
4
100 10
6 x
100 x 10
6
100 10
6 x
120 x 10
6
120 10
Auxiliary conductors
(Cu)
Max. number of
cross-section
(solid/stranded)
Standard connection = strain-relief clamp
Without end sleeve
With end sleeve acc. to DIN 46228 Part 2
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16); 1 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
1 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 1 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Optional connection = tension spring
Without end sleeve
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Position indicator
switches
Tension spring terminals 1 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 1 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
Weights 3-pole
4-pole
Guide frames
Guide frames
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
59
63
39
71
76
47
64
68
45
77
82
54
85
121
52
103
146
62
82
88
60
99
106
84
82
88
60
99
106
84
90
96
70
108
108
119
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00062a
30 30
and/
or
NSE0_00927a
h
=
m
m
m
a
x
.
Siemens AG 2009
15/27
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
1)
24 V and 30 V only with undervoltage release UVR (F3).
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Closing/
Charging stored-
energy feature
Max. force required to operate the hand lever
Required number of strokes on the hand lever
N d 230
9
Manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Charging stored-
energy feature
Closing solenoid
(CC)
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 U
s
Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 U
s
Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
Minimum command duration at U
s
for the closing solenoid ms 60
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)/
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical closing
Manual operating
mechanism
For data see above.
Motor Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 U
s
Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 48 V DC
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 U
s
Power consumption of motor AC/DC VA/W 135/135
Time required to charge the stored-energy mechanism at 1 U
s
s d 10
Closing solenoid For data see above.
For motor and
closing solenoid
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic;
Motor and closing solenoid for the same rated control supply voltages
2 A TDz (slow)/1 A
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic (for different
rated control supply voltages)
At U
s
= 24 ... 30 V
At U
s
= 48 ... 60 V
At U
s
= 110 ... 125 V DC/
110 ... 127 V AC
At U
s
= 220 ... 250 V DC/
208 ... 240 V AC
2 A
2 A
1 A
1 A
Solid-state release signals
Measuring accuracy of the solid-state release Protection functions according to
EN 60947;
current indication d 10 %;
base quantities d 1 %;
derived quantities d 4 %
Auxiliary releases
Undervoltage
releases
UVR (F3) and
UVR-t
d
(F4)
Response values Pickup
Dropout
t 0.85 U
s

(circuit breaker can be closed)
0.35 ... 0.7 U
s

(circuit breaker is tripped)
Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1
Extended operating range for battery operation At 24 V DC, 30 V DC,
48 V DC, 110 V DC,
220 V DC
0.85 ... 1.26
Rated control supply voltage U
s
Instantaneous
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
Delayed
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
V
V
V
V
110 ... 127/208 ... 240/380 ... 415
24/30/48/60/110/220 ... 250
1)
110 ... 127; 208 ... 240; 380 ... 415
48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
Power consumption (pickup/uninterrupted duty) AC
DC
VA
W
20/5
20/5
Opening time of circuit breaker at U
s
= 0 ms 200
- Version UVR (F3)
Instantaneous
With delay
ms
ms
80
200
- Version UVR-t
d
(F8)
With delay, t
d
= 0.2 to 3.2 s
Reset through additional NC contact direct switching off
s
ms
0.2 ... 3.2
d 100
Miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow) 1 A
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/28
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Auxiliary releases
Shunt release (ST)
(F1, F2)
For continuous command
(100 % ON period), locks
out on momentary-con-
tact commands

- Response value pickup > 0.7 U
s

- Operating range 0.85 ... 1.1 U
s
- Extended operating range
for battery operation
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 U
s
- Rated control supply voltage U
s
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
V
V
110; 230
24; 30; 48; 60; 110; 220
- Power consumption AC/DC VA/W 15/15
- Minimum command duration at U
s
ms 60
- opening time of circuit breaker at
U
s
= 100 %
AC/DC ms 80
- Short-circuit protection
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational
class)/ miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
5 % ON period - Response value Pickup > 0.7 U
s

s
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC
60 V DC, 110 V DC
220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 U
s
s
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
V
V
110 ... 127; 208 ... 240
24; 48; 110 ... 125; 220 ... 250
s
ms 25
- Opening time of circuit breaker at
U
s
= 100 %
AC/DC ms 50
Smallest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational
class)/miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A
With stored energy
feature consisting of
shunt release and capac-
itor storage device
s
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
V
V
110; 230
110; 220
s
- Storage time at U
s
/
recharging time at U
s
maximum 5 min/minimum 5 s
- Opening time of circuit breaker,
As with "for continuous
command"
Remote reset solenoid for mechanical tripped indicator (F7)
Remote reset solenoid for
mechanical tripped indica-
tor (F7)
s
At 24 V DC, 48 V DC
110 V DC
220 V DC
0.7 ... 1.26 U
s
s
for the remote
reset solenoid
ms 60
miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
2 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 24 V DC
and 48 V DC,
1 A TDz (slow)/1 A at 110 V and
208 ... 250 V
Contact position-driven auxiliary switches (S1, S2, S3, S4, S7, S8)
i
V AC/DC 500
e
V AC/DC 500
imp
kV 4
Switching capacity Alternating current
50/60 Hz
- Rated operational voltage U
e
- Rated operational current
I
e
/AC-12
I
e
/AC-15
V
A
A
24 ... 230
10
4
380/400
10
3
500
10
2
Direct current - Rated operational voltage U
e
- Rated operational current
I
e
/DC-12
I
e
/DC-13
V
A
A
24
10
8
48
8
4
110
3.5
1.2
220
1
0.4
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)
Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
10 A TDz, 10 A Dz
10 A
Siemens AG 2009
15/29
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Size I to III
Type 3WL1
Ready-to-close signaling switch (S20) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)
Switching capacity Alternating current - Rated operational voltage U
e
- Rated operational current I
e
V
A
250
8
e
e
V
A
125
0.4
250
0.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 2 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch (S24) and signal switch for auxiliary releases (S22, S23) (acc. to DIN VDE 0630)
Switching capacity Alternating current - Rated operational voltage U
e
e
/AC-12
V
A
250
8
e
e
/DC-12
V
A
24
6
125
0.4
250
0.2
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class) 6 A Dz (quick)
Tripped signal switch Signal duration after tripping Until manual or electrical
remote reset (option)
Position indicator switch on guide frame
Type of contact Signal: - "Circuit breaker in connected
position"
- "Circuit breaker in test position"
- "Circuit breaker in disconnected
position"
3 CO
2 CO
1 CO
or
1 CO
1 CO
1 CO
i
AC 50/60 Hz
DC
V
V
440
250
e
V 250
imp
kV 4
Switching capacity Rated operational
current I
e
- I
e
/AC-12
- I
e
/AC-15
- I
e
/DC-12
- I
e
/DC-13
- A 300 (AC)
- R 300 (DC)
24 V 10 A, 110/127 V 10 A,
220/240 V 10 A, 320/440 V 10 A
220/240 V 4 A,
320/440 V 3 A,
24 V 10 A, 48 V 2.5 A,
220/240 V 0.2 A,
24 V 3.0 A, 220/240 V 0.1 A
120 V 6 A, 240 V 3 A
125 V 0.22 A, 250 V 0.11 A
Short-circuit protection Largest permissible DIAZED fuse (gL operational class)
Largest permissible miniature circuit breaker with C characteristic
8 A TDz (slow)
8 A TDz (slow)
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/30
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
For the setting range of the operating current I
g
see page 15/31.

Protection functions ETU15B ETU25B ETU27B
Parameterization by D D D & S
Functional overview of the solid-state release system
L
Overload protection
Function can be switched on/off
--
--
--
Setting range I
R
= I
n
... 0.5-0.55-0.6-0.65-0.7-
0.75-0.8-0.85-0.9-1
0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-
0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-
0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
Switchable overload protection
(I
2
t- or I
4
t-dependent function)
-- -- --
Setting range for time-lag class t
R
at I
2
t 10 s fixed 10 s fixed 10 s fixed
R
at I
4
t -- -- --
Thermal image can be switched on/off -- -- --
Phase failure sensitivity -- at t
sd
= 20 ms (M) at t
sd
= 20 ms (M)
N
Function can be switched on/off -- --
N conductor setting range I
N
= I
n
... -- -- 1
S
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection --
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --
Setting range I
sd
= I
n
... -- 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12
Setting range for delay time t
sd
-- 0-M-100-200-300-400 ms 0-M-100-200-300-400 ms
Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection
(I
2
-- -- --
sd
at I
2
t -- -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking function -- -- --
I
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
Function can be switched on/off -- -- --
Setting range I
i
= I
n
... 2-3-4-5-6-7-8 Fixed for I
i
t 20 I
n
, max. 50 kA Fixed for I
i
t 20 I
n
, max. 50 kA
G
Ground-fault protection -- -- Fixed mounted
Tripping and alarm function -- -- --
Tripping function can be switched on/off -- --
Alarm function can be switched on/off -- -- --
Detection of the ground-fault current through summation
current formation with internal or external neutral con-
ductor transformer
-- --
Detection of ground-fault current through external
current transformer
-- -- --
Setting range of the operating current I
g
for release -- -- A-B-C-D-E
g
for alarm -- -- --
Setting range of the delay time t
g
-- -- 100-200-300-400-500 ms
Switchable ground-fault protection characteristic
curve (I
2
-- -- --
g
at

I
2
t -- -- --
Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. func. -- -- --
Parameter set switchover
Switchable between parameter set A and B -- -- --
LCD
Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) -- -- --
Graphical LCD (24 V, ext. power supply required) -- -- --
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated -- -- --
Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP -- -- --
Measurement-function capable with measurement
function Plus
-- -- --
LED display
Solid-state release active
Alarm
ETU fault
L-release --
S-release --
I-release --
N-release -- --
G-release -- --
G-alarm -- -- --
Release through extended protection function -- -- --
Communication -- -- --
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)
Overload warning -- -- --
Load shedding, load receiving -- -- --
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms -- -- --
Temperature alarm -- -- --
Phase unbalance -- -- --
Instantaneous short-circuit release -- -- --
Short-time delayed short-circuit release -- -- --
Overload trip -- -- --
Neutral conductor release -- -- --
Ground-fault protection release -- -- --
Ground-fault alarm -- -- --
Auxiliary relay -- -- --
ETU fault -- -- --
R
NSE0_00888b
R
sd
sd
i
NSE0_00889a
g
g
NSE00890
NSE00891
Delay time figures given in ms. Available
M = Motor protection, corresponds to 20 ms. -- Not available
D = Rotary coding switch Optional
D & S = Rotary coding and slide switch
K = Communication
M/K = Menu/communication
Siemens AG 2009
15/31
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
General data
1
5
Protection functions ETU45B ETU76B
Parameterization by D & S M/K
Functional overview of the solid-state release system
Overload protection
--
Setting range I
R
= I
n
... 0.4-0.45-0.5-0.55-0.6-
0.65-0.7-0.8-0.9-1
0.4 ... 1
Switchable overload protection
(I
2
t- or I
4

R
at I
2
t 2-3.5-5.5-8-10-14-17-21-25-30 s 2 ... 30 s
R
at I
4
t 1-2-3-4-5 s 1 ... 5 s
Thermal image can be switched on/off
Phase failure sensitivity At t
sd
= 20 ms (M) (on/off)
Neutral conductor protection
N conductor setting range I
N
= I
n
... 0.5 ... 1 0.2 ... 2
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection
Setting range I
sd
= I
n
... 1.25-1.5-2-2.5-3-4-6-8-10-12 1.25 I
n
... 0.8 I
cw
sd
M-100-200-300-400 ms M-80 ... 4000 ms
Switchable short-time delayed short-circuit protection
(I
2

sd
at I
2
t 100-200-300-400 ms 100 ... 400 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-Modul
Instantaneous short-circuit protection
Setting range I
i
= I
n
... 1.5-2.2-3-4-6-8-10-12-0.8 x I
cs
1.5 I
n
... 0.8 I
cs
Ground-fault protection Module can be retrofitted Module can be retrofitted
Tripping and alarm function
Tripping function can be switched on/off
Alarm function can be switched on/off --
Detection of the ground-fault current through summation cur-
rent formation with int. or ext. neutral conductor transformer

Detection of ground-fault current through external
current transformer

g
for release A-B-C-D-E A ... E
g
for alarm A-B-C-D-E A ... E
Setting range of the delay time t
g
100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 ms
Switchable ground-fault protection characteristic curve
(I
2

g
at I
2
t 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100 ... 500 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking ground-fault protect. function By CubicleBUS-Modul By CubicleBUS-Modul
Parameter set switchover
Switchable between parameter set A and B --
LCD
Alphanumeric LCD (4-line) --
Graphical LCD (24 V, external power supply required) --
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated
Communication-capable through PROFIBUS DP
Measurement-function capable with measurement function
Plus

LED display
Solid-state release active
Alarm
ETU fault
L-release
S-release
I-release
N-release
G-release (only with ground-fault prot. module) (only with ground-fault prot. module)
G-alarm (only with ground-fault prot. module) (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Release through extended protection functions
Communication
Signals from signal switches with external CubicleBUS modules (relays)
Overload warning
Load shedding, load receiving
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms
Temperature alarm
Phase unbalance
Instantaneous short-circuit release
Short-time delayed short-circuit release
Overload trip
Neutral conductor release
Ground-fault protection release (only with ground-fault prot. module) (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Ground-fault alarm (only with ground-fault prot. module) (only with ground-fault prot. module)
Auxiliary relay
ETU fault
Setting range of the operating current Ig Increment size for adjustment of M For continuation of legend
see page 15/30.

Size I and size II Size III From ... to Increment
size
From ... to Increment
size
A 100 A 400 A 0 ... 1 0.1 1000 ... 1600 50
B 300 A 600 A 1 ... 100 1 1600 ... 10000 100
C 600 A 800 A 100 ... 500 5 10000 ... max 1000
D 900 A 1000 A 500 ... 1000 10
E 1200 A 1200 A
Siemens AG 2009
15/32
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Characteristic curves

Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own
characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following.
The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest
setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A
rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-
der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant
parts of the characteristics have to be combined.
The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-
lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-
fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-
mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore
not yet enabled, the opening time is extended, depending on the
level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the
break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must
be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.
2)
Refer to the following legend for tolerances.
The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures
at the circuit breaker between 5 and +55 C. The release can
be operated at ambient temperatures of 20 to +70 C. An ex-
tended tolerance band can apply at these temperatures.
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU25B solid-state release,
LSI characteristic curve
G characteristic curve
Tolerances for the set currents
L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 x I
R
S: 0 %, +20 %
I: 0 %, +20 %
G: 0 %, +20 %
Tolerances for the tripping times
L: 20 %, +0 % for I
2
S: 0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
I: < 50 ms
G: 0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU15B solid-state release
LSIN characteristic curve
S characteristic curve
1)
Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A
Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.
2)
With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response
times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the
tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
0
[
s
]
/
n
R
min
R
max
0,4 ... 1,0 x
n
sd
min
1,25 ... 12 x
n
0 ... 0,4 s
sd
max
sd
max
sd
min
i
> 20 x
n
max. 50 kA
i
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
100 1000 10000 100000
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
1
[
s
]
g
min g
max
100 ... 1200 A
1)
0,1 ... 0,5 s
g
max
g
min
A
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
7
[
s
]
/
n
i
min
i
max
R
min
R
max
0,5 ... 1,0 x
n
2 ... 8 x
n
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
1
9
[
s
]
/
n
R
min
R
max
0,4 ... 1,0 x
n
N
sd
min
1,25 ... 12 x
n
0 ... 0,4 s
sd
max
sd
max
sd
min
i
> 20 x
n
max. 50 kA
i

O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
3
[
s
]
sd
0,1 ... 0,4 s
/
n
2
sd
= const
1,25 ... 12 x
n
2
sd
= const
sd
= const
0,02 ... 0,4 s
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
Siemens AG 2009
15/33
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Every solid-state release type and every setting has its own
characteristic curve. Only a selection is shown in the following.
The characteristic curves each show the largest and smallest
setting range of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers with 1000 A
rated current at 500 V rated voltage with various releases. In or-
der to obtain a complete tripping characteristic, the relevant
parts of the characteristics have to be combined.
The characteristic curves show the behavior of the solid-state re-
lease when it is activated by a current that is already flowing be-
fore the tripping operation. If the overcurrent tripping occurs im-
mediately after switch on and the solid-state release is therefore
not yet enabled, the opening ime is extended, depending on the
level of the overcurrent by up to 15 ms. In order to determine the
break-times of the circuit breakers, approximately 15 ms must
be added to the opening times shown for the arcing time.
2)
Refer to the following table for tolerances.
The characteristic curves shown apply to ambient temperatures
at the circuit breaker between -5 and +55 C. The release can be
operated at ambient temperatures of -20 to +70 C (ETU76B
with graphics display up to +55 C). An extended tolerance
band can apply at these temperatures.
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker with ETU45B and ETU76B solid-state
release, L characteristic curve
release, I characteristic curve
release, G characteristic curve
S characteristic curve
Further characteristic curves are shown in the manual and the
planning and configuring tool SIMARIS deSign, or ask your
Siemens contact person.
Tolerances for the set currents
L: tripping operations between 1.05 and 1.2 I
R
S: 0 %, +20 %
I: 0 %, +20 %
G: 0 %, +20 %
Tolerances for the tripping times
L: 20 %, +0 % for I
2
S: 0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
I: < 50 ms
G: 0 %, +60 ms or -0 %, 10 % for tripping times greater than 600 ms
1)
Sizes I and II: 100 ... 1200 A
Size III: 400 ... 1200 A.
2)
With single-pole loading in the lowest rated current range, the response
times of the short-circuit release can be extended by approx. 10 % and the
tripping times by approx. 15 % compared to the characteristic curve.
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 100
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
2
a
[
s
]
R
/
n
0,4 ... 1,0 x
n
R
2
4
2 ... 30s for
4
= const
2
= const
1 ... 5s for
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 1
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
4
a
[
s
]
/
n
i
1,5 x
n
... 0,8 x
cs
/
cs
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
100 1000 10000 100000
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
5
a
g
0,1 ... 0,5 s
g
[
s
]
100 ... 1200 A
1)
A
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
2
= const
0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10 1
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
2
6
a
[
s
]
/
n /
cw
sd
0,02 ... 4 s
2
sd
0,1 ... 0,4 s
1,25 x
n
... 0,8 x
cw
sd
O
p
e
n
i
n
g

t
i
m
e
= const
= const
Siemens AG 2009
15/34
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Dimensional drawings
Voltage transformer for SENTRON 3WL
Current transformers for overload protection in the
N conductor
External current transformers for N conductor with copper
connection pieces
Dimensions for option with door interlocking
1) Mounting surface
2) Center SENTRON 3WL operator panel
3) 8 mounting holes for door sealing frame
4) 3 mounting holes for door interlocking
External current transformers for N conductor without copper
connection pieces
Door cut-out for operator panel
Door cut-out for operator panel using the door sealing frame
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA31-0AA0
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA32-0AA0
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA33-0AA0
NSE0_01103a
277
1
2
5
99
For mounting on
35 mm standard
mounting rail
83
55
5
1
4
4
6
8
1
3
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
0
6
b
1 5
97
41
1
7
0
1 3, 5
9
1
2
4
30 30
90
50, 5
31 0
1 31
5
1
4
4
6
8
1
3
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
0
7
b
1 3, 5
1
7
0
1 1 3
9
1
2
4
30
1 23
52
1 60
31 0
1
7
0
30 30
5
1
4
4
6
8
1
3
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
0
8
b
1 3, 5
1 84
2
4
9
1
Size I, 3WL9 111-0AA21-0AA0
Size II, 3WL9 111-0AA22-0AA0
Size III, 3WL9 111-0AA23-0AA0
Door cut-out with edge protector
Inner dimensions with mounted
edge protector
Option with/without door interlocking
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
3
7
5
60
8
1
2
2
9
6
,
8
8
R 1 3, 1
R 22
1 8
36
1 6
70
83
8
,
9
4
0
51
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
3
7
6 5
4
88
1
1
5
1
3
1
R 27
95
1 1 3 3
6
5
,
5
51
51
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
3
7
7
1 60
4
5
1 61
1 84
3
3
1
R 1 5
1
0
7
1
2
3
3
4
0
2
4
0
295
NSE0_001 64c
40 1 20
300
31 4
40 1 20
R5 R5
2)
3)
6
5
5, 5
1
4
0
1
7
5
3
5
0
5, 5
1
4
0
1
8
5
1
8
0
5, 5
NSE0_0061 0c
1 ) 4)
21
1 2
40
1
1
,
5
Siemens AG 2009
15/35
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
CubicleBUS module
3WL9 111-0AT2.-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AT28-0AA0
3WL9 111-0AT33-0AA0
4
7
,
5
70
9
4
86
6
N
S
E
0
_
0
2
0
8
5
81,9
45,5
38
19
1
5
3
30
N
S
E
0
_
0
2
0
8
6
Siemens AG 2009
15/36
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Door cut-out for operator panel using protective cover IP55
Safety clearances from grounded parts
Protective cover, IP55
Safety clearances from live parts
1)
Value for plate; 0 mm for struts and grids.
2)
40 mm (size II: 70 mm) for plates which cover the lateral openings in the
guide frame.
All safety clearances above the circuit breaker refer to the upper
edge of the auxiliary connector - not to the upper edge of the arc
chute! See dimensional drawings on pages 15/37 to 15/45, parts
4) and 5).
Rated operational voltage
V/AC
Above
auxiliary connector
mm
Lateral
(each side)
mm
Rear
mm
Size I, fixed-mounted version
500 75
1)
0 0
690 75
1)
0 0
Size I, withdrawable version,
without arc chute cover
500 50
1)
0 0
690 50
1)
0 0
with arc chute cover
500 0 0
2)
0
690 0 0
2)
0
Size II, fixed-mounted version
500 75
1)
0 0
690 75
1)
0 0
1000 180 0 0
Size II, withdrawable version,
500 50
1)
0 0
690 50
1)
0 0
1000 100 0 0
500 0 0
2)
0
690 0 0
2)
0
Size III, fixed-mounted version
500 75
1)
0 0
690 75
1)
0 0
1000 180 0 0
Size III, withdrawable version,
500 50
1)
0 0
690 50
1)
0 0
1000 100 0 0
500 0 0
2)
0
690 0 0
2)
0
DC non-automatic air circuit breakers
300 45 0 0
600 200 0 0
1000 150 0 0
6
8
3
4
0
-
3
5
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
0
2
9
c
295-300
341
4 x R5
4 x 5,5
7
2
7
2
7
0
Switch mounting level
Mounting surface for switch or
guide frame
Rated operational voltage
V/AC
Above
auxiliary connector
mm
Lateral
(each side)
mm
Rear
mm
Size I, fixed-mounted version
500 150 20 20
690 300 50 125
500 150 20 14
690 300 50 14
500 14 100 14
690 14 100 14
Size II, fixed-mounted version
500 250 50 20
690 600 100 140
1000 430 100 125
500 250 50 14
690 600 100 30
1000 350 100 14
500 14 50 14
690 14 225 14
Size III, fixed-mounted version
500 75 20 20
690 500 100 125
1000 430 100 125
500 50 20 14
690 500 100 14
1000 350 100 14
500 14 50 14
690 14 200 14
8
5
148 313
4
3
5
1
7
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
0
3
0
b
395
400
Circuit-breaker
mounting level
Siemens AG 2009
15/37
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size I, up to 1600 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
4-pole version
1) Mounting space for removal of the arc chutes.
2) Arc quenching space.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the
system.
4) Auxiliary connector with SIGUT screw terminals.
5) Auxiliary connector with spring-loaded connection.
6) Dimension to inside surface of the closed cabinet door.
7) Fixing points for mounting the circuit breaker in the system.
8) "Secure OFF" locking device.
9) Key operation.
11) Terminal face.
14) Space for electrical auxiliary circuit connections.
For safety clearances to grounded parts and to live parts see
page 15/36.
Standard version
Horizontal connection
Optional connection variants
Front connection (single)
Front connection (double hole)
according to DIN 43673
Vertical connection
15 270
300 10
390
4
3
7
,
5
1
2
3
,
5
4
4
0
,
5
2
7
5
4) 5)
NSE0_00611a
82 c
47
d
e
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
1
2
c
6
60 90 90 90
55 55 55 55
3)
2
6
4
2
1
N
S
E
0
0
6
1
3
b
13,5
3
5
3
5
11)
NSE0_00614e
a
a
1
5
0
2
7
5
5
1
6
5
4
1
,
5
1) 2) 14) 9)
150
210
106
230 127
6) 45
8)
33,5
60,5
3
2
7
,
5
4
6
1
,
5
7
6
3)
5,5
82 c
47
f
g
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
1
5
c
6
90 90 90 60
55 55 55 55
3)
1
4
4
0
4
2
1
4
0
13,5
N
S
E
0
0
6
1
6
b
8
0
8
0
11)
410
320
58 139
60
55
90 90 90
3)
7)
7)
13,5
N
S
E
0
0
6
1
7
a
M 8
3
5
11)
1 1 3, 5
1 28, 5
1
2
7
,
5
3
0
2
6
7
,
5
6
0
1 3, 5
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
1
8
c
35 1 1 )
60 90 90 90
b
3)
NSE00619
3)
90 90 90 60
NSE00620
Rated
circuit breaker
current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 1000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
1250 ... 1600 15 15 15 6 461 39 551
Siemens AG 2009
15/38
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size I, up to 1600 A, 3- and 4-pole, withdrawable version

page 15/36.
For flange connections see following page.
Standard version
Vertical connection
4-pole version
2) For guide frame without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded or
non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for supporting phase barriers in the system.
7) SENTRON 3WL in connected position.
8) SENTRON 3WL in test position.
9) SENTRON 3WL in disconnected position.
10) Fixing holes 10 mm.
11) Terminal face.
55
270
30 13
210
300
320
5) 4)
10)
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
6
8
,
5
4
6
5
,
5
NSE0_00621a
169,5 c
62,5
1
1
4
0
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
2
2
a
6
90 90 90
55 55 55 55
1 5
3)
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
2
3
b
2
6
3
7
3
3
5
3
5
1 1 )
1 3, 5
260
350
6
9
2
8
7
45
88,5
121,5
140,5
220
3)
7)
2)
8)
9)
10)
58
6)
7
6
327
9
367,5
382,5
1
5
0
a
a
2
7
5
4
6
0
5
1
9
3
2
7
,
5
NSE0_00624c
4
0
3
1
27
42
14
62,5
169,5 c
3
4
4
9
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
2
5
a
6
90 90 90
55 55 55 55
1 5
1
4
4
0
4
0
3
7
3
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
2
6
b
8
0
8
0
1 1 )
6
9
2
8
7
260
350
1 3, 5
55 55 55 55
68 139
25 270
320
410
13,5
N
S
E
0
0
6
2
7
a
3
8
11)
150
165
38
1
2
7
,
5
3
0
2
6
7
,
5
6
0
NSE00628a
13,5
11)
1 5 90 90 90
b
3)
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
2
9
a
260
350
2
8
7
6
9
260
350
2
8
7
6
9
55
15
90
3)
10) 10)
90 90
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
0
a
Rated circuit breaker current
A
a b c
Up to 1000 10 10 10
1250 ... 1600 15 15 15
Siemens AG 2009
15/39
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size I, up to 1600 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
system.
page 15/36.
For more connection options see previous page.
Flange connection
121
14
N
S
E
0
0
6
3
1
90 90 1 5 90
55 55 55 55
3)
1
4
2
,
5
5
9
5
9
2
6
3
3
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
2
a
2
8
2
,
5
260
350
M 1 2
2
8
7
6
9
Siemens AG 2009
15/40
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size II, up to 4000 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
page 15/36.
Standard version
Vertical connection, up to 3200 A
4-pole version
2) Arc quenching space, "d 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
11) Terminal face.
12) Circuit breaker upper edge, only 1000 V circuit breaker.
13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
10
270
85
440
570
5) 4)
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
4
0
,
5
4
3
7
,
5
NSE0_00633a
82 c
47
d
e
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
4
d
6
90 130 130 130
40
90 90 90 90
3)
40
2
6
4
2
1
N
S
E
0
0
6
3
5
c
3
5
3
5
11)
13,5
NSE0_00636e
150
210
230
45
5,5
127
1
5
0
2
7
5
3
2
7
,
5
4
6
1
,
5
7
6
5
4
1
,
5
a
a
1)
6)
3)
106
4
5
1
,
5
5
1
6
6
2
1
13)
14)
2)
12)
82 c
47
g
f
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
7
d
6
90 130 130 130
40
90 90 90 90
3)
40 4
0
4
0
1
4
4
2
1
N
S
E
0
0
6
3
8
c
11)
8
0
8
0
13,5
130 90
30 30
130 130
90
3
5
11)
7)
9
7)
460
128 139
590
3) 13,5
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
9
f
113,5
128,5
1
3
4
,
5
9
8 2
9
0
3
0
3
0
NSE00640b

1
3
,
5
35
11)
90 130 130 130
b
3)
NSE00641
3)
130 130 90 130
NSE00642
Rated circuit
breaker
current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
2500 15 15 20 6 461 39 551
3200/4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
Siemens AG 2009
15/41
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
2) Arc quenching space, "d 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-
conductive surfaces.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
Vertical connection 4000 A
200 130 200
10
20
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
6
8
142
162
3
0
3
0
85 Nm
11)
40
1
0
0
1)
2)
3
4
5
,
5
7
9
,
5
13,5
4
6
1
,
5
5
4
1
,
5
Siemens AG 2009
15/42
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size II, up to 3200 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
page 15/36.
For vertical connection and flange connection see following
page.
Standard version
4-pole version
2) For guide frame d 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
10) Fixing holes, diameter 10 mm.
11) Terminal face.
12) Guide frame upper edge only 1000 V AC version.
surfaces.
55 350
270
40
480
10) 10)
4
6
5
,
5
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
6
8
,
5
NSE0_00643b
4) 5)
c
62,5
169,5
1
1
4
0
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
4
b
6
55 1 30 1 30 1 30
40
90 90 90 90
3)
45, 1
2
6
3
7
3
40
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
4
5
c
3
5
3
5
1 1 )
1 3, 5
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
220 27
42
4
0
3
1
45
6)
88,5
121,5
140,5
58
8)
9)
7
6
3
2
7
,
5
5
1
8
,
5
1
5
0
a
a
2
7
5
4
6
0
5
2
0 6
2
0
327
367,5
382,5
13)
12)
2)
7)
10)
14
9
3)
NSE0_00646f
c
62,5
169,5
3
4
4
9
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
7
b
6
55 1 30 1 30 1 30 45
40
90 90 90 90
3)
1
4
4
0
4
0
3
7
3
40
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
4
8
c
8
0
1 1 )
8
0
1
3
,
5
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
30
138 139
95 270
460
590
30
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
9
a
13,5
3
8
11)
90
400
530
90 90 90
55 45 130 130 130
10)
10)
6
9
2
8
7
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
5
2
b
3)
A
a b c
Up to 2000 10 10 10
2500 15 15 20
3200/4000 30 30 20
Siemens AG 2009
15/43
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
4-pole version
system.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
Vertical connection,
up to 3200 A
Vertical connection 4000 A
Flange connection
157
172
1
3
5
1
0
0
2
9
0
3
0
3
0 N
S
E
0
0
6
5
0
a
38
11)
55 45 1 30 1 30 1 30
b
3)
NSE0_00651 a
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
11)
200
1
0
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
6
9
40
3
0
3
0
177
197
130
55
200
10
20
45
3
1
5
,
5
1
0
9
,
5
4,6
121
N
S
E
0
0
6
5
3
45 1 30 1 30 1 30
90 40
3)
5
9
5
9
2
6
3
3
2
8
2
,
5
1
4
2
,
5
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
5
4
a
M 1 2
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
Siemens AG 2009
15/44
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size III, up to 6300 A, fixed-mounted version, 3- and 4-pole
4-pole version
2) Arc quenching space, "d 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or
system.
11) Terminal face.
13) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker facing grounded or
page 15/36.
Standard version
Vertical connection
12 205 270
680
890
4) 5)
4
3
7
,
5
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
4
0
,
5
NSE0_00655a
N
S
E
0
0
6
5
6
c
1
1
4
5
1
82
20
47
6
130 210 210 210
50
160 160 160
3)
2
6
4
2
1
160
N
S
E
0
0
6
5
7
c
3
5
3
5
11)
50
13,5
NSE0_00658e
150
210
230
45
35
5,5
127
1
5
0
2
7
5
3
2
7
,
5
4
6
1
,
5
7
6
5
4
1
,
5
3
0
3
0
6)
3)
106
4
5
1
,
5
5
1
6
6
2
1
13) 1)
14)
2)
12)
82
20
47
3
4
5
4
1
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
5
9
d
6
1 30 21 0 21 0 21 0
50
1 60 1 60 1 60 1 60
3)
4
0
4
2
1
4
0
1
4
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
6
0
c
8
0
1 1 )
8
0
1 3, 5
50 50 50
160
210
704
914
130
210
15
210
248 139
7) 7)
30
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
6
1
e
13,5
3
5
11)
M10
3)
142
162
40
107
N
S
E
0
0
6
6
2
a
9
4
,
5 1
2
0
3
3
0
,
5
3
0
1
5
13,5
40
11)
85 210 210 210
10
3)
20
NSE00663
3)
130 210 210 210 130
NSE00664a
Siemens AG 2009
15/45
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
page 15/36.
Standard version
Horizontal connection up to 5000 A
Front connection (single hole),
up to 4000 A
according to DIN 43673 up to
4000 A
Vertical connection, up to 6300 A
4-pole version
2) For guide frame d 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing grounded
or non-conductive surfaces.
3) Grooves (4 mm wide, 5 mm deep) for
supporting phase barriers in the system.
11) Terminal face.
12) Guide frame upper edge only 1000 V guide frame.
surfaces.
5) 4)
57
590
800
160 270
10)
10) 10)
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
6
8
,
5
4
6
5
,
5
NSE0_00665b
20
62,5
169,5
1
1
4
0
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
6
6
b
6
57
85 21 0 21 0
50
1 60 1 60 1 60 1 60
590
800
21 0
2
6
3
7
3
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
6
7
c
3
5
3
5
1 1 )
50 1
3
,
5
630
840
2
8
7
6
9
220 27
42
4
0
3
1
45
6)
88,5
121,5
140,5
58
8)
9)
7
6
3
2
7
,
5
5
1
8
,
5
1
5
0
3
0
3
0
2
7
5
4
6
0
5
2
0 6
2
0
327
367,5
382,5
13)
7)
12)
2)
10)
14
3)
9
NSE0_00668d
20
62,5
169,5 3
4
4
9
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
6
9
b
6
57
1 60 1 60 1 60 1 60
85 21 0 21 0 21 0
800
590
50
1
4
4
0
3
7
3
4
0
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
7
0
c
8
0
8
0
1 1 )
50
1
3
,
5 630
840
2
8
7
6
9
704
30
30
914
217 270
260 139
30 13,5
N
S
E
0
0
6
7
1
a
3
8
11)
177
197
24
9
4
,
5
1
2
4
,
5
3
0
3
3
0
,
5
N
S
E
0
0
6
7
2
a
13,5
38
11)
57
a
590
91 4
800
b 21 0
1 0
20
704
NSE0_00673b
b
630
840
2
8
7
6
9
160
210 85 57 210 210
630
840
160 160 160
6
9
2
8
7
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
7
4
a
A
a b
4000 40 210
5000 40 210
6300 5 245
Siemens AG 2009
15/46
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Size III, up to 6300 A, withdrawable version, 3- and 4-pole
page 15/36.
Flange connection, up to 4000 A
121
N
S
E
0
0
6
7
5
85 21 0 21 0 21 0
30
57
590
800
91 4
1 60 1 60 1 60 1 60
704
5 1
4
2
,
5
2
8
2
,
5
5
9
5
9
2
6
3
3
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
7
6
a
630
840
M
1
2
2
8
7
6
9
Siemens AG 2009
15/47
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Schematics
Terminal assignment diagram
Internal wiring
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L1
L2
L3
24 V DC input
Remote reset bell alarm & tripped indicator F7
G transformer S2
N sensor S2
N sensor S1
ext. voltage transformer Com
ext. voltage transformer L3
0 V DC
24 V DC
G transformer S1
"Spring charged" signal S21
1st auxiliary release F1 "ST"
S1 "NO"
S1 "NC"
Closing solenoid
"Ready to close" signal S20
S2 "NO"
S2 "NC"
F4 only "quick OFF"
F4 only "quick OFF"
2nd auxiliary release: F2 "ST", F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td"
S3 "NO" or S7 "NO"
S3 "NC" or S7 "NO"
S4 "NO" or S8 "NO"
S4 "NC" or S8 "NO"
EMERGENCY STOP
or short terminals
Terminals External wiring
L
L+
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
0
5

o
+ BUS
BUS
Short terminals if no N-sensor
M
Local electric close S10
opt. motor main switch S12
Charging motor
(Option F02/F12)
/COM16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D
P
W
r
it
e
E
n
a
b
le F
r
e
e
F
r
e
e
C
lo
s
e
O
p
e
n
+
I
N
O
U
T
E
x
t
e
r
n
a
l
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l
Y
1
F
1
,

2
N
e.g. current transformer in the
star point of power transformer
or a summation current
transformer 1200 A /1A
Trip signalling switch S24
(position after tripping)
Signaling contact at the 1 st auxiliary release
S23
Signaling contact at the 2nd auxiliary release
Termination resistor,
if not external CB-module!
N
o
t

a
v
a
i
l
a
b
l
e

w
i
t
h

c
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

"
F
0
2
"

o
r

F
1
2
.
C
O
M
1
5
/
C
O
M
1
6

m
o
d
u
l
e

i
s

a
t

p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n

"
-
X
7
"
.
optional
Accessories
(Auxiliary switch S1, S2 = Standard)
(sw) (br)
L1
L2
L3
N
L+
L
c
L+
c
L+
L
c
c
L+
L
c
L+
L
c
Siemens AG 2009
15/48
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Example of an overall circuit diagram for SENTRON 3WL
(3WL1. .......4GN4Z C11+C22+K07)
Manual/motorized operating mechanism with stored-energy fea-
ture with electrical ON button (option C11), with ready-to-close
signaling switch (optionl C22), with LSING solid-state release,
with "UVR" undervoltage release (F3), with "ST" shunt release
(F1), with tripped signal switch (option K07), with auxiliary switch
4 NO + 4 NC.
Function diagram of
SENTRON 3WL circuit breaker
-A1 Solid-state release ETU
-S1/-S2 1st auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)
-S3/-S4 2nd auxiliary switch block (2 NO + 2 NC)
-S7 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S7 (2 NO) can be used
if there is no S3 - S3 and S7 have
the same terminal assignment/mounting space
-S8 (optional) 2nd auxiliary switch block, S8 (2 NO) can be used
if there is no S4 - S4 and S8 have
the same terminal assignment/mounting space
3WL1. ..-.....-...2 (2 NO + 2 NC) S1+S2
3WL1. ..-.....-...4 (4 NO + 4 NC) S1+S2+S3+S4
3WL1. ..-.....-...7 (6 NO+ 2 NC) S1+S2+S7+S8
3WL1. ..-.....-...8 (5 NO + 3 NC) S1+S2+S3+S8
-S10 Electrical ON button
-S11 Internal motor shutdown switch (if spring is tensioned)
-S12 Motor shutdown switch
(no automatic tensioning of spring)
-S20 Ready-to-close signaling switch
-S24 Tripped signal switch
-F1 1st auxiliary release, shunt release
-F3 2nd auxiliary release, undervoltage release
-F5 Tripping solenoid
-M Motor for "charging energy store"
-P Stored-energy mechanism
-QS Actuator lever for "stored-energy mechanism"
-Q1 Main contacts
-T1/-T2/-T3 Current transformers
-X5/-X6/-X7/-X8 Terminals
-Y1 Closing solenoid
-R Indicator and reset button for solid-state release
-X8.9/-X8.10 Connection option: external neutral conductor
transformer
M
R
-S4 -S3 -S2 -S1 -Q1
L1
(L+)
-
X
7
.
9

-
X
6
.
7

-
X
6
.
1
4
-
X
5
.
1
2
-
X
5
.
2

-
X
6
.
6
-
X
7
.
1
2
-
X
7
.
1
4
QS P
N
(L-)
-S11
-Y1
-F1
-F3
-T3
-T1
-T2
1 3 5 -
X
6
.
1
2
-
X
6
.
1
0
-
X
6
.
4
-
X
6
.
2
-
X
5
.
1
0
-
X
5
.
8
-
X
5
.
6
-
X
5
.
4
2 4 6
-
X
6
.
1
1
-
X
6
.
9
-
X
6
.
3
-
X
6
.
1
-
X
5
.
9
-
X
5
.
7
-
X
5
.
5
-
X
5
.
3
-
X
8
.
9
-
X
8
.
1
0
*
N
(L-)
ETU
L
S
I
G
N N
-A1
-F5
-
S
2
4
-
S
2
0
-
X
6
.
5
-
X
7
.
1
3
-
X
5
.
1
1
-
X
6
.
1
3
-
X
6
.
8
-
X
5
.
1
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
5
8
b
L1
(L+)
mech.
mech.
-
S
1
0
U<
-S12
version
OFF
ON
ON
* Short terminals, if no N sensor
ON
OFF
electr.
release
contact
NSE0_01559c
M1
P
1
S20
F1
F2
F3
F4
Y1
Q1
S1 & S2
S3 & S4
F5
T1
T2
T3
T4
2
3
S24
A1
L
S
I
G
N N
Siemens AG 2009
15/49
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Example of the mode of operation of Zone Selective
Interlocking functionality in power distribution
SENTRON 3VL and SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers used in various
staggered levels
Connection diagram for a Zone Selective Interlocking functionality with
multiple infeed and several outgoing units with SENTRON 3WL circuit
breakers
Zone Selective Interlocking functionality: Connection using a coupling
switch, use of SENTRON 3WL circuit breakers
More information
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3VL
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
8
9
7
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
3
4
5
6
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
SENTRON 3WL SENTRON 3WL
SENTRON 3WL
NSE0_01898
3
4
5
6
6 5 1 2 3 4
3
4
5
6
Z
S
I

m
o
d
u
l
e
ZSI module Z
S
I

m
o
d
u
l
e
SENTRON 3WL
NSE0_01899
3
4
5
6
6 5 1 2 3 4
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
ZSI module
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Z
S
I
m
o
d
u
l
e
Siemens AG 2009
General data
15/50
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Technical specifications
1)
Make-time through activation solenoid for synchronization purposes
2)
Operating Manual).
3)
Further technical specifications on request.
1)
At U
e
= 220 V DC.
2)
At U
e
= 300 V DC.
3)
At U
e
= 600 V DC.
4)
At U
e
= 1000 V DC.
Size II
Type 3WL12 10 3WL12 20 3WL12 40
Rated current I
n
at 40 C
Main conductor A ... 1000 2000 4000
e
(1000 V version, see Catalog LV 1, order code "A05")
V DC ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000 ... 600/1000
i
V DC 1000 1000 1000
imp
Main current paths
Auxiliary circuits
Control circuits
kV
kV
kV
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
12
4
2.5
Isolating function acc. to EN 60947-2 Yes Yes Yes
Operation
Storage
C
C
25/+75
40/+70
25/+75
40/+70
25/+75
40/+70
Permissible load
At rear horizontal main circuit
connections
(Cu painted black)
Up to 40 C
Up to 55 C
Up to 60 C
Up to 70 C
A
A
A
A
1000
1000
1000
1000
2000
2000
2000
1950
4000
3640
3500
3250
Power loss at I
n
for symmetrical loads
Withdrawable circuit breakers W 280 770 1640
Operating times
Make-time
Opening time
Electrical make-time (through activation solenoid)
1)
Electrical opening time (instantaneous undervoltage release)
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
35
34
100
73
73
35
34
100
73
73
35
34
100
73
73
Endurance
3)
2)
Oper. cycles
1000 V version Oper. cycles
2)
Oper. cycles
10 000
15 000
6000
1000
15 000
10 000
15 000
6000
1000
15 000
10 000
15 000
4000
1000
15 000
Switching frequency
600 V version
1000 V version
1/h
1/h
60
20
60
20
60
20
Mounting position
Degree of protection IP20 without cabinet door, IP41 with door sealing
frame, IP55 with cover
Auxiliary conductors (Cu)
Max. number of
cross-section
(solid/stranded)
Standard connection = strain-relief clamp
Without end sleeve
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16); 1 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
1 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 1 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Optional connection = tension spring
Without end sleeve
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 2.5 mm
2
(AWG 14)
2 0.5 mm
2
(AWG 20) ... 2 1.5 mm
2
(AWG 16)
Weights 3-pole
4-pole
Guide frames
Guide frames
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
56
60
31
67
72
37
56
60
31
67
72
37
64
68
45
77
82
54
NSE0_00061 a
30 30
NSE0_00062a
30 30
NSE0_00927a
h
=
m
m
m
a
x
.
and/
or
Size II
Type 3WL12
Switching capacity class DC
Up to 220 V DC
Up to 300 V DC
Up to 600 V DC
Up to 1000 V DC
I
cc

I
cc

I
cc

I
cc

kA
kA
kA
kA
35
30
25
20
cw
0.5 s
1 s
2 s
3 s
kA
kA
kA
kA
--
35
1)
/30
2)
/25
3)
/20
4)
--
--
Siemens AG 2009
15/51
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Characteristic curves
DIGmat S100 characteristic curve
Dimensional drawings
DIGmat S100
DIGmat S100 DIGmat S100 drilling pattern

0,01
0,1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0,1 1 10
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
7
8
[
s
]
R= 10 s [B]
2 s [A]
B
A
B
A
R
= 0.4
n R
= 1.0
n
MIN
= 1.25
R I
= 1.5
R I
MAX
= 4
I n
/
n
= 0.4 ... 1.0
= 2 ... 10 s at 6
= 1.25 ... 4
R
R
I
n
R
R
nn
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
7
6
AUTO
ON
R2
R1
AUTO
MAN PEAK DIAG
MAIN
MENUE
271
1
3
6
DIG S100
_
+
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
7
5
250
1
2
2
1
1
5
257
3,5
Siemens AG 2009
15/52
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
page 15/36.
Standard version
Vertical connection
4-pole version
2) Arc quenching space, "d 690 V" circuit breaker facing grounded or non-conductive
surfaces.
11) Terminal face.
surfaces.
surfaces.
17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or
10
270
85
440
570
5) 4)
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
4
0
,
5
4
3
7
,
5
NSE0_00633a
82 c
47
d
e
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
4
d
6
90 130 130 130
40
90 90 90 90
3)
40
2
6
4
2
1
N
S
E
0
0
6
3
5
c
3
5
3
5
11)
13,5
NSE0_02003
150
210
230
45
5,5
127
1
5
0
2
7
5
3
2
7
,
5
4
6
1
,
5
7
6
5
4
1
,
5
a
a
1)
6)
3)
106
4
5
1
,
5
5
1
6 6
0
2
2) 16) 17)
14)
12)
15)
4
4
7
82 c
47
g
f
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
7
d
6
90 130 130 130
40
90 90 90 90
3)
40 4
0
4
0
1
4
4
2
1
N
S
E
0
0
6
3
8
c
11)
8
0
8
0
13,5
130 90
30 30
130 130
90
3
5
11)
7)
9
7)
460
128 139
590
3) 13,5
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
3
9
f
113,5
128,5
1
3
4
,
5
9
8 2
9
0
3
0
3
0
NSE00640b

1
3
,
5
35
11)
90 130 130 130
b
3)
NSE00641
3)
130 130 90 130
NSE00642
Rated circuit
breaker
current
A
a b c d e f g
Up to 2000 10 10 10 11 451 34 541
4000 30 30 20 6 461 39 551
Siemens AG 2009
15/53
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
page 15/36.
For vertical connection and flange connection see following
page.
Standard version
4-pole version
2) For guide frame d 690 V, without arc chute cover, arc quenching space facing
grounded or non-conductive surfaces.
8) SENTRON 3WL in test position
11) Terminal face.
12) Guide frame upper edge only 1000 V AC version.
surfaces.
surfaces.
17) Arc quenching space, 1000 V circuit breaker (with high arc chute) facing grounded or
55 350
270
40
480
10) 10)
4
6
5
,
5
1
2
3
,
5
2
7
5
4
6
8
,
5
NSE0_00643b
4) 5)
c
62,5
169,5
1
1
4
0
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
4
b
6
55 1 30 1 30 1 30
40
90 90 90 90
3)
45, 1
2
6
3
7
3
40
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
4
5
c
3
5
3
5
1 1 )
1 3, 5
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
220 27
42
4
0
3
1
45
6)
88,5
121,5
140,5
58
8)
9)
7
6
3
2
7
,
5
5
1
8
,
5
1
5
0
a
a
2
7
5
4
6
0
5
2
0
6
5
1
4
9
6
327
367,5
382,5
16) 17)
2)
12)
15)
7)
10)
14
9
3)
NSE0_02084
c
62,5
169,5
3
4
4
9
3
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
7
b
6
55 1 30 1 30 1 30 45
40
90 90 90 90
3)
1
4
4
0
4
0
3
7
3
40
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
4
8
c
8
0
1 1 )
8
0
1
3
,
5
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
30
138 139
95 270
460
590
30
N
S
E
0
0
6
4
9
a
13,5
3
8
11)
90
400
530
90 90 90
55 45 130 130 130
10)
10)
6
9
2
8
7
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
5
2
b
3)
A
a b c
Up to 2000 10 10 10
4000 30 30 20
Siemens AG 2009
15/54
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
4-pole version
system.
11) Terminal face.
page 15/36.
Vertical connection
Flange connection
157
172
1
3
5
1
0
0
2
9
0
3
0
3
0 N
S
E
0
0
6
5
0
a
38
11)
55 45 1 30 1 30 1 30
b
3)
NSE0_00651 a
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
121
N
S
E
0
0
6
5
3
45 1 30 1 30 1 30
90 40
3)
5
9
5
9
2
6
3
3
2
8
2
,
5
1
4
2
,
5
N
S
E
0
_
0
0
6
5
4
a
M 1 2
400
530
2
8
7
6
9
Siemens AG 2009
15/55
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
Schematics
Schematics of the DIGmat S100 and the SENTRON 3WL non-automatic
air circuit breaker
Application examples
The connection to the circuit breakers is not dependent on direc-
tion and polarity; the circuit diagrams can be adapted
accordingly.
If the parallel or series connections are made directly to the
connecting bars, for thermal reasons the continuous load on the
circuit breakers must only be 80 % of the permissible operational
current. If the parallel or series connection is made at a distance
of 1 m from the connecting bars, the circuit breaker can be used
at full operational current load.
]
Grounded-neutral system
@Load
L1
N
PE
AC230
DC24
+
-
X1.2 X1.1 X5.2 X5.1
+
-
DC24
AC230
X4.i1+
X4.i1-
X4.i2+
X4.i2-
DIGmat S100
+
-
X2.1
X2.3
+
-
-Q01 1 3 5
3WL
X4.01
+
X4.01
-
X4.02
+
X4.02
-
X4.03
+
X4.04
+
X4.04
-
X4.03
-
-K1
-K2 11
12 14
11
12
14
-X6.14 -X5.12
SENTRON
-F1 -F3
-X6.13 -X5.11
-Q01 2 4 6
N
S
E
0
_
0
1
5
7
7
a
Emergency STOP
Auxiliary power
Automatic RESET
Shunt
(60mV)
E
x
c
i
t
a
t
i
o
n

/

A
l
a
r
m
A
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c

/

R
e
s
e
t
Digital output
Digital input
Rated operational
voltage
Required series
breaks at rated voltage
For 3-pole non-automatic air circuit
breakers
(operational currents up to 4000 A/
conducting path)
For 4-pole non-automatic air circuit breakers
(operational currents up to 4000 A/conducting path)
Up to 300 V + 10 %
1-pole,
2 parallel conducting
paths,
only with grounded-
neutral system
2-pole 1-pole,
3 parallel conducting paths,
only with grounded-neutral
system
2-pole
2 parallel conducting
paths
Over 300 V + 10 %
Up to 600 V + 10 %
2-pole,
only with grounded-
neutral system
1-pole,
2 parallel conducting paths,
system
2-pole
Over 600 V + 10 %
Up to 1000 V + 10 %
(version for 1000 V
required, order with "-Z"
and order code A05)
1-pole,
only with grounded-
neutral system
2-pole,
system
1-pole,
only with grounded-
neutral system
Siemens AG 2009
15/56
Siemens LV 1 T 2009
1
5
More information
Siemens AG 2009

3WL Siemens

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

3WL Siemens

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Siemens LV 1 2009

An important prerequisite for computer-

9th position: Electronic releases ETU76B with pixel graphics

10th position: Electronic release

13th position: Operating

14th position: 1st auxiliary release Shunt release

15th position: 2nd auxiliary release Without 2nd auxiliary release

Protective cover for mechanical ON/OFF

Parameterization of the protection functions

Additional measured values

Anda mungkin juga menyukai